RAM Structural System

V8i (SELECTseries 6)

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Last Updated: October 15, 2013

Legal Notices
Trademark Notice
Bentley and the B Bentley logo are registered or non-registered trademarks of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated.
RAM SBeam, RAM Structural System, RAM Manager, RAM Modeler, RAM Steel, RAM Frame, RAM
Foundation and RAM Concrete are registered or non-registered trademarks of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.

Copyright Notice
Copyright (c) 2013 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to applicable
software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Acknowledgements
Objective Grid C++ Library Copyright Rogue Wave Software, Inc.
Virtual Print Engine (VPE) Copyright IDEAL Software
Contains CM2 MeshTools by Computing Objects
Math Kernel Library (MKL) Intel Corporation
The Boost Graph Library (BGL) Siek, J.G., Lee, L., and Lumsdaine, A.
Ultimate Toolbox Dundas Software Ltd.
TurboDXF Ideal Engineering
Portions Copyright Microsoft Corporation
Includes Adobe PDF Library technology. Portions Copyright Adobe Systems, Inc.
Clipper library Angus Johnson
zlib software Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.

Restricted Rights Legends

If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America, its agencies and/or
instrumentalities (U.S. Government), it is provided with restricted rights. This software and
accompanying documentation are commercial computer software and commercial computer
software documentation, respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and restricted

RAM Structural System

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Legal Notices
Restricted Rights Legends
computer software pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use, modification, reproduction,
release, performance, display or disclosure of this software and accompanying documentation by the
U.S. Government are subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C.F.R.
12.212, 52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable. Contractor/Manufacturer is Bentley
Systems, Incorporated, 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341-0678.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and International treaties.

RAM Structural System

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Disclaimer
The software and related documentation, including this documentation, are protected by both United
States copyright law and international treaty provisions. Any unauthorized copying or reproduction is
strictly prohibited and subject to civil and criminal penalties. Please refer to the License Agreement
(EULA) for authorization to make a backup copy of the software. You may not sell this software or
documentation or give copies of them to anyone else.
Except as expressly warranted in the License Agreement (EULA), Bentley Systems, Incorporated
disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties or
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the software, the accompanying
written materials, and any accompanying hardware. All results should be verified to the user's
satisfaction. The contents of these written materials may include technical inaccuracies or typographical
errors and may be revised without prior notice.

RAM Structural System

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Disclaimer

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction .....................................................................................................11
Chapter 2: Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors ....................................................... 13
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

2.6

Model Status ............................................................................................................................................................................... 13

Saving the Model .......................................................................................................................................................................13
Modes ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Load Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Generated Load Combinations ........................................................................................................................14
2.4.1
Custom Load Combinations ...............................................................................................................................14
2.4.2
Design Criteria ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Codes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15
2.5.1
AISC ASD / LRFD Criteria .................................................................................................................................. 15
2.5.2
Eurocode Criteria ..................................................................................................................................................20
2.5.3
CAN/CSA S16-01, S16-09 ................................................................................................................................... 21
2.5.4
BS5950 ........................................................................................................................................................................22
2.5.5
Australia AS4100 Criteria ................................................................................................................................. 24
2.5.6
Assign Menu ................................................................................................................................................................................26
Columns ......................................................................................................................................................................26
2.6.1
Beams ..........................................................................................................................................................................27
2.6.2
Horizontal Braces ...................................................................................................................................................29
2.6.3
Braces ..........................................................................................................................................................................30
2.6.4
Sidesway .................................................................................................................................................................... 31
2.6.5
Sway-Sensitive Design Method (BS5950:2000 Only) ............................................................................ 31
2.6.6
Frame Numbers ...................................................................................................................................................... 32
2.6.7
Process Menu ...........................................................................................................................................................32
2.6.8
The Design Process ............................................................................................................................................... 34
2.6.9
Exiting and Changing Modes .............................................................................................................................35
2.6.10

Chapter 3: Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes ......................................................... 37

3.1

General
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.14
3.1.15

RAM Structural System

........................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
Steel Design Codes .................................................................................................................................................37
Steel Shapes ..............................................................................................................................................................38
Load Combinations ................................................................................................................................................39
Sloping Beams ......................................................................................................................................................... 39
Cross Section Classification ............................................................................................................................... 40
Torsion ........................................................................................................................................................................41
Tension Capacity .................................................................................................................................................... 41
Compression Flange Bracing ............................................................................................................................ 41
Major Axis Bracing .................................................................................................................................................41
Minor Axis Bracing ................................................................................................................................................ 42
User Assigned Unbraced Length ..................................................................................................................... 43
Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Tees ..............................................................................................................44
Horizontal Braces ...................................................................................................................................................44
Column Moments ................................................................................................................................................... 44
Kinked Column Equivalent Uniform Moment ........................................................................................... 45

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

3.2

3.3

Member Code Check .................................................................................................................................................................45

AISC 360 (ASD and LRFD) ..................................................................................................................................45
3.2.1
ASD 9th / LRFD 3rd .............................................................................................................................................. 53
3.2.2
BS5950:1990 / 2000 ............................................................................................................................................ 56
3.2.3
CAN/CSAS16-01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 67
3.2.4
CAN/CSA S16-09 .................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.2.5
EUROCODE ................................................................................................................................................................72
3.2.6
AS 4100-98 ............................................................................................................................................................... 75
3.2.7
Joint Code Check ........................................................................................................................................................................ 82
Assumptions and Limitations ...........................................................................................................................82
3.3.1
Joint Forces ............................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.3.2
Joint Design ...............................................................................................................................................................86
3.3.3

Chapter 4: Steel Standard Provisions Reports ..................................................................... 95

4.1
4.2
4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7
4.8
4.9

Code Check Criteria .................................................................................................................................................................. 97

Load Combinations ................................................................................................................................................................... 97
AISC 360 Direct Analysis Validation ................................................................................................................................. 98
Design Code .............................................................................................................................................................. 98
4.3.1
Second-Order Analysis ........................................................................................................................................ 98
4.3.2
Notional Loads ........................................................................................................................................................ 99
4.3.3
Reduced Stiffness ................................................................................................................................................... 99
4.3.4
Member Code Check .............................................................................................................................................................. 100
AISC ........................................................................................................................................................................... 100
4.4.1
Eurocode ................................................................................................................................................................. 100
4.4.2
CAN/CSA S16-01 / S16-09 Member Code Check .................................................................................. 100
4.4.3
BS 5950 Member Code Check ........................................................................................................................ 101
4.4.4
AS 4100-98 Member Code Check ................................................................................................................. 101
4.4.5
Member Check Summary .................................................................................................................................................... 102
Criteria ..................................................................................................................................................................... 102
4.5.1
Code Check Criteria ............................................................................................................................................ 102
4.5.2
Load Combinations .............................................................................................................................................102
4.5.3
Summary Results .................................................................................................................................................102
4.5.4
Joint Code Check ......................................................................................................................................................................102
Story Number ........................................................................................................................................................102
4.6.1
Joint Number ......................................................................................................................................................... 103
4.6.2
Final Design ........................................................................................................................................................... 103
4.6.3
Joint Data and Material Properties .............................................................................................................. 103
4.6.4
Criteria ..................................................................................................................................................................... 103
4.6.5
Results ......................................................................................................................................................................103
4.6.6
Stiffener Design [AISC 9th Only] ...................................................................................................................105
4.6.7
Web Plate Details [AISC 9th Only] ............................................................................................................... 105
4.6.8
BS5950 Draft Amend, April 1998 / BS5950-1:2000 ........................................................................ 105
4.6.9
Eurocode 3: BS EN 1993-1-8:2005 ..............................................................................................................106
4.6.10
Member Forces ........................................................................................................................................................................ 106
Member Force Summary ..................................................................................................................................................... 107
Member Force Envelope ......................................................................................................................................................107

Chapter 5: Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors ..........................................................109

5.1
5.2

Modes ...........................................................................................................................................................................................109
Load Combinations ................................................................................................................................................................ 109
Generated Load Combinations ...................................................................................................................... 110
5.2.1

RAM Structural System

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

5.3
5.4
5.5

5.6
5.7

Custom Load Combinations ............................................................................................................................111

5.2.2
Criteria .........................................................................................................................................................................................111
Codes .........................................................................................................................................................................111
5.3.1
ASD/LRFD Criteria ..............................................................................................................................................112
5.3.2
Assign Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................. 113
Frame Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 113
5.4.1
Frame Numbers ................................................................................................................................................... 113
5.4.2
Process Menu ............................................................................................................................................................................114
Member View/Update .......................................................................................................................................114
5.5.1
Member Code Check ...........................................................................................................................................115
5.5.2
Joint View/Update .............................................................................................................................................. 115
5.5.3
Joint Code Check .................................................................................................................................................. 116
5.5.4
View/Update Result Icons ...............................................................................................................................116
5.5.5
The Design Process ................................................................................................................................................................ 117
Exiting and Changing Modes ..............................................................................................................................................119
To switch to Steel-Standard Provision Mode ..........................................................................................119
5.7.1
To exit RAM Frame ............................................................................................................................................. 119
5.7.2

Chapter 6: Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes ..........................................................121

6.1
6.2

Load Combinations ................................................................................................................................................................ 122

Code Check .................................................................................................................................................................................123
Assumptions and Limitations ........................................................................................................................ 123
6.2.1
Reduced Beam Section Check ........................................................................................................................ 123
6.2.2
AISC 2005/2010 (ANSI 341-05/10) ASD and LRFD ........................................................................ 124
6.2.3
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD ................................................................................................................ 137
6.2.4
AISC 1997 LRFD ............................................................................................................................................... 146
6.2.5
UBC97 ASD ..........................................................................................................................................................155
6.2.6
UBC 1997 LRFD ................................................................................................................................................ 158
6.2.7

Chapter 7: Steel Seismic Provision Reports ........................................................................163

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5

Load Combinations ................................................................................................................................................................ 164

Member Code Check .............................................................................................................................................................. 164
Member Check Summary .................................................................................................................................................... 164
Joint Code Check ......................................................................................................................................................................164
Joint Check Summary ............................................................................................................................................................ 165

RAM Structural System

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

10

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Introduction

The RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors are used to check steel beams, columns, braces and joints against
the specification requirements of several steel design codes. The steel post-processors consist of the
Standard Provisions Steel Post-Processor and the Seismic Provisions Steel Post-Processor.
The Standard Provisions Steel Post-Processor is utilized to check all frame steel members, and moment
frame joints, according to the requirements of the selected steel design code. Specifically, the ability of
the steel members to resist the applied gravity and lateral (including seismic) loads is checked.
The Seismic Provisions Steel Post-Processor is utilized to check all frame steel members according to
the requirements of the selected seismic design code. These requirements ensure that the structure is
well proportioned and detailed to resist seismic loads in a ductile and life-safe manner.
Chapter 2, Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors on page 13, describes the powerful Standard
Provisions Post-Processor used to check steel members and moment frame joints for a selected steel
design code.
Chapter 3, Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes on page 37, provides an explanation of the
technical issues, assumptions, and code interpretations implemented in the Steel Standard Provisions
Mode. It is critical that the engineer read and understands this chapter so as to be aware of how these
assumptions affect the design.
Chapter 4, Steel Standard Provisions Reports on page 95, provides a detailed description of the
information contained within the Standard Provisions report output.
Chapter 5, Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors on page 109, describes the powerful Seismic
Provisions Post-Processor used to check steel members and moment frame joints for a selected seismic
design code.
Chapter 6, Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes on page 121, provides an explanation of the
technical issues, assumptions, and code interpretations implemented in the Steel Seismic Provisions
Mode. It is critical that the engineer read and understands this chapter so as to be aware of how these
assumptions affect the design.
Chapter 7, Steel Seismic Provision Reports on page 163, provides a detailed description of the
information contained within the Seismic Provisions report output.

RAM Structural System

11

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Introduction

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

12

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

The purpose of the Standard Provision Post-processors is to investigate each steel frame member and
restrained (fixed) beam-column joint for the stress and capacity requirements of the selected steel
design specification. The specifications currently implemented are the AISC, Eurocode, CAN/CSAS16-01, CAN/CSA S16-09, and BS 5950:1990 and 2000. Using Code-generated and/or user-defined load
combinations the controlling interaction equation value is calculated for each member and the results
displayed graphically. The stiffeners and web plate (doubler) required to resist moment-frame joint
forces are also calculated and displayed graphically. In addition to the screen display, several output
reports are also available.

2.1 Model Status

To access the Model Status dialog box, go to the File menu and select the Model Status command. The
dialog that appears for each module is similar and provides a list of what critical model data is available
to this module. If it is indicated that the model cannot be run in the selected module, the dialog box will
also list what information is still needed. Refer to the RAM Manager Manual for more information on the
Model Status.

2.2 Saving the Model

Any operations performed in RAM Frame are only saved to the permanent Database when the File
Save command is invoked in any module. This includes changes to Criteria, Combinations and even
Update Database in View/Update. If the RAM Structural System is closed without performing a save in at
least one of the modules then all changes made in RAM Frame will be discarded. Refer to the Saving the
Model Section of the RAM Manager manual for more information.

2.3 Modes
The RAM Frame Program contains three modes of operation, namely: Analysis mode (as described
previously), Steel Mode (the Standard Provision sub-mode which is described here) and the Drift
Control mode. To access the Steel Standard Provision mode select the Mode-Steel-Standard Provision
command. This mode can also be entered by selecting the Steel mode and Standard Provision submode from the dropdown controls located on the dialog bar below the toolbars.
Upon initially entering this mode, the Standard Provision Steel Code dialog will automatically appear.
The engineer selects the desired steel design code in this dialog. This dialog can be subsequently
displayed at any time when in this mode by selecting the Criteria-Codes command.

RAM Structural System

13

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Load Combinations

2.4 Load Combinations

Load combinations can be generated by the program and/or defined by the engineer. Load
combinations must be defined before any post-processing can be done.
After the Steel Design Code dialog is closed the Load Combination Generation dialog box appears. This
dialog is used to select a desired building code and automatically generate load combinations based on
those load cases previously analyzed. The engineer can select to include any or none of the load cases in
the generated list of combinations. Click the Apply button after selecting the appropriate load cases to
automatically generate and view load combinations in this dialog. After load combinations are
generated the engineer can decide which combinations to consider in the design. All rows of load
combinations with the Use check box selected will be considered during post-processing.
When this dialog is closed the user can return to view or change their combinations by selecting the
Combinations-Generate command.
Custom load combinations (where the user can select their own load factors) can be generated in the
dialog displayed by selecting Combinations-Custom.
Once load combinations have been defined and selected, the Process commands become available. The
Code Check, View/Update and Reports commands can then be used as described in the next several
sections.
Refer to the Load Combination Generator Manual for more information about this component.

2.4.1 Generated Load Combinations

All generated combinations are normalized so that they can be compared against an interaction
equation value of 1.0. For some implementations of ASD the allowable stresses can be increased by 1/3
for wind and seismic loads. This is handled in the program by assigning factors of 0.75 in the load
combinations (i.e., the loads are factored down rather than the allowable stresses being factored up).
Note that Dynamic and Other type load cases are not included in the automatically generated load
combinations; if desired, custom combinations which include these must be created by the user.
Refer to the Load Combination Generator Manual for more information about the generated load
combination templates installed with the program.

2.4.2 Custom Load Combinations

The custom load combination dialog is displayed by selecting the Combinations-Custom command.
The load factors should be normalized such that for all load combinations the allowable interaction
equation value is 1.0. For example, as explained for Generated Load Combinations, the allowable
stresses for ASD can be increased by 1/3 for wind and seismic loads. This should be handled in the
custom load combinations by assigning factors of 0.75 rather than 1.0 (i.e., the loads are factored down
rather than the allowable stresses being factored up).

RAM Structural System

14

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
Separate combinations of plus and minus factors should be created where appropriate; the program
does not automatically reverse the signs of the factors on lateral load cases for user-specified custom
load combinations.
Refer to the Load Combination Generator Manual for more information about custom load
combinations.

2.5 Design Criteria

Below is a brief description of the global criteria that pertain to the Member and Joint Code Checks
performed by all the steel design specifications. Technical descriptions of how each criterion is used in
the Code Check are provided later in the manual.
The system administrator sets default criteria at the time of installation. They can be modified on a
model-by-model basis by issuing the commands described in this section. Changes can be made on a
permanent basis by selecting the Tools-Defaults Utility in the RAM Manager.
Note that these criteria are global in that they apply to all the appropriate members in the model.
However, the user also has the ability to override these global criteria on a member-by-member basis.
Refer to the description of the Assign commands for additional information.
The Criteria menu items are divided into three sections based on functionality. Namely there is a codes
command, followed by the group of member criteria items, followed by the joint criteria items.

2.5.1 Codes
The dialog displayed by selecting the Criteria-Codes command displays all the available steel design
codes. Select the code by which to perform design checks. Select the option Show this dialog when
entering Standard Provision Mode to automatically have this dialog displayed each time the engineer
switches to the Steel-Standard Provisions mode. The commands available under the Criteria menu (as
described next) will change depending on the steel code selected. The Load Combinations Generation
will automatically be displayed directly after this dialog is closed.
Modifying the Steel Code will remove all previously generated load combinations and will invalidate the
results of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than
the Code Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.

2.5.2 AISC ASD / LRFD Criteria

This section applies to AISC 360-10 (ASD and LRFD), AISC 360-05 (ASD and LRFD) as well as ASD 9th
Edition and LRFD 3rd Edition. Some differences are noted.

B1 and B2 Factors
This only applies to AISC 360, the command is only available when that code is selected. With the
Criteria B1 and B2 Factors command, the user can specify whether or not to apply the B1 and B2

RAM Structural System

15

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
factors. Generally the option to apply B1 factors should be selected. Generally, if the model was analyzed
without using the P-Delta option, the option to apply B2 factors should be selected. For braced frames,
RM should be set to 1.0, for moment-frame and combined systems it should be set to 0.85.

Sidesway
This does not apply to AISC 360, the command is not available when that code is selected. With the
Criteria - Sidesway command, the user can indicate whether a frame is Braced , Unbraced or Partially
Braced against sidesway. This affects the calculation of K, Cb and Cm. Partially Braced refers to
structures that are braced in one direction but not in the other. When Partially Braced is selected the
user must specify the range of member orientation, with respect to the global coordinate axes, for which
the member is to be considered braced.
Modifying the Sidesway criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that
Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

K-Factor
This does not apply to AISC 360, the command is not available when that code is selected. With the
Criteria - K-Factor command, Kx and Ky values are set for the beams, columns and braces in the
structure . For columns, the K-Factor can be calculated by the program using Nomograph values or can
be specified by the engineer.
Modifying the K-Factor criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that
Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Flange Bracing
With the Criteria - Flange Bracing command, the bracing condition of beams and columns is defined.
Beam flanges can be braced continuously along the top flange, continuously along the bottom flange or
not braced. Column flanges can be defined to be braced by the deck or by knee braces and beams that
frame in within a given angle of a column face, or not braced.
Modifying the Flange Bracing criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Column Moments
With the Criteria Column Moments command the user can specify the portion of the calculated
Gravity load moments to be included in the design of the columns. Percentages for Dead Load, Live Load
and Roof Load may be specified individually. For the Live and Roof Loads, this reduction is in addition to
any Live Load Reduction calculated for the column. This feature should be used cautiously, as it causes

RAM Structural System

16

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
the program to ignore portions of the calculated moments. See the Technical Notes for more
information. Normally the percentages should be specified as 100% to include the full-calculated
moments.
This feature is available for each of the steel design codes. Modifying the Column Moments criteria after
a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that Code Check. The model will be
redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check colors) indicating that the Code
Check must be re-run.

Axial Slenderness Limit

Within the RAM Frame Standard Provisions Steel Post-Processor the user can use the Criteria - Axial
Slenderness Limits to specify a slenderness limit KL/r < 200 to apply to all members in compression
within the model and a limit L/r < 300 for all members (except round bars) in tension as detailed in and
ASD 9th and LRFD 3rd Specification Section B7. This is not a code requirement but is common practice.

Joints
The criteria by which the joint web plate and stiffeners will be designed for moment (rigid) frame
connections can be viewed and modified through the dialog displayed by invoking the Criteria-Joints
command. The four tab sheets, as described in detail below, allow the engineer to provide the
appropriate information regarding the material of the web plates and stiffeners, the geometric
restrictions of the joint, the design forces and the optimization criteria of the web plate and stiffeners.
Modifying the Joint criteria after a Joint Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of
that Joint Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen without any joint colors indicating that
the Joint Code Check must be re-run. Joint Code Checks are not performed on hanging columns.
Where offset beams framing into the column flanges are offset from the plane of the web of the column,
the Joint Code Check assumes no offset between the beam and the plane of the web of the column.

Material
The engineer should provide the strength of the material to be used for stiffeners and web plates. The
capacity of each of the column, web plate and stiffener is calculated independently of each other and is a
function of each of their material strengths.

Geometry
For the RAM Structural System to determine if a particular joint is valid (refer to limitations section for
definition of valid) the engineer must provide the maximum angle that a beam can frame into the
column and still be considered attached to the flange of the column. This angle refers to the angle
between the major axis of the column and the longitudinal axis of the beam. Beams framing into a
column beyond this angle are assumed to frame into the web of the column.
Several codes require the engineer to do specific checks only where two compressive forces are applied
to opposite sides of a column at the same elevation (concurrent-compression check). For a valid joint
with a single lateral beam framing into each flange of an I-Section column, the top flanges of the beams
are assumed to be at the same elevation. In the event that the top flanges of both beams apply a
compressive force on the column, these concurrent-compression checks will be performed. However,
depending on the depth of each beam, the bottom flanges may not be at the same elevation. The
engineer is responsible for determining the maximum difference in elevation that can exist between the

RAM Structural System

17

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
bottom flanges of the two beams for which they still want the concurrent-compression checks
performed.
The distance provided by the engineer for the concurrent-compression check is also used to determine
the maximum difference in elevation for a single diagonal stiffener to be used. When necessary, beams
whose difference in bottom flange elevation exceeds the value provided by the engineer will be
provided with two horizontal stiffeners (one for each beams bottom flange). For beams whose
difference in bottom flange elevation is less than the value provided by the engineer, one diagonal
stiffener will be provided between the beam flange elevations.

Forces
The forces applied at the beam-column connection can be determined from either the design load forces
or from the bending capacities of the members at the joints.
When design load forces are selected, the program will determine the largest panel-zone shear, as well
as the largest concentrated force at each beam flange, from all load combinations. The forces are
calculated as described in the technical section. The engineer also has the option of indicating which
method the program uses to apply beam axial load to the joint. The ramifications of each of the three
available options on the joint design forces are indicated in the following figure. Case A illustrates the
flange forces when the user has indicated to use the design moment ignoring the axial load. Case B is
where the engineer is using the design moment considering the axial load and Case C is where the
engineer only considers axial load if it increases the force on the column.
M

M
P

M/d

M/d + P/2

M/d + P/2

M/d

M/d - P/2

M/d

If the plastic capacity of the section is selected, then the engineer must specify an appropriate overstrength factor. The plastic capacity of the member is calculated as the product of the members plastic
modulus, yield strength and the over-strength factor. The force applied to the column flange is thus the
member plastic capacity divided by the distance between the centers of the beam flanges. In the event
that the member has a reduced beam section specified (refer to Criteria-Reduced Beam Section) the
moment at the face of the column used to calculate the joint forces is taken as:
Mpr + Vp*Xf
where, as illustrated in the following figure:
Mpr is the member plastic capacity at the reduced beam section,
L is the distance between reduced beam sections,
Xf is distance from the center of the reduced beam section to the face of the column, and

RAM Structural System

18

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
Vp is taken as 2 Mpr / L.
Xf

Optimization
The engineer has many options for controlling how RAM Frame designs stiffeners and web plates
(doublers). The engineer can specify minimum values for stiffener dimensions, and web plate thickness.
If stiffeners or a web plate are required they will be sized no smaller than the minimum dimensions
specified. The increment to which the stiffener dimensions and web plate thickness should be rounded
should also be provided. If the stiffener dimension required to resist the forces is larger than the
minimum specified stiffener thickness, it will be rounded up to the closest increment. The same applies
to the web plate thickness. The maximum permissible stiffener thickness is taken as three times the
thickness of the thinnest beam flange framing into the joint. This limit is an arbitrary limit not mandated
by any code. The engineer can specify a maximum permissible web plate thickness. If the engineer
wants all the stiffeners at a joint to have the same width and thickness, then the top check box should be
selected. The maximum thickness and width will be applied to all the stiffeners at a joint, but the lengths
may differ.
As shown in the following figure the cope dimension refers to the dog-ear cut that must be made in the
stiffener so that the plate will avoid conflict with the web toe of the column flange-to-web fillet. While
this is typically a detailing decision the engineer should (and RAM Frame does) consider this dimension
in their calculations, and a conservative value should be specified.
The engineer has a couple of options to specify to the program how the web plates are to be detailed for
attachment to the columns. The engineer can choose to weld the plate to the flanges of the column using
a CJP weld or a fillet weld. They can also decide to plug weld the web plate to the column web. These
user selections are currently only relevant to the AISC code checks.
Where the check box for the fillet weld is not selected, the program assumes that the web plate is
attached to the column flange with a CJP weld. The assumption made is that the web plate is cut short of
the web toe of the column flange-to-web fillet radius, and the weld is made onto this toe. Alternatively, if
the fillet weld check box is selected the engineer is indicating that the web plate is to be welded directly
to the column flange. In this case the edge of the web plate will need to be beveled so as to avoid the root
of the columns web-flange weld (see the following figure).

Cope
Dimension

RAM Structural System

Stiffener

19

Web Plate

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
To accommodate the detailing requirement of the fillet weld attachment the thickness of the web plate
may need to be increased beyond the thickness required just to resist the applied loads (refer to AISC
Design Guide 13 for more information).
Note that in the output the thickness required to meet the fillet weld-detailing requirement is specified
separately from the design thickness required to resist the loads. Refer to the report descriptions for
more details on the output.
The engineer can also choose to plug-weld the web plate to the column web (as is recommended in high
seismic zones). If this is done then there are no checks required for web plate buckling. If the engineer
indicates that no plug welds are to be used RAM Frame will determine the thickness of the web plate to
prevent buckling. This is an AISC code requirement that may control the required thickness of the plate
as needed to resist the applied loads.
In general the web plate is designed to resist the applied forces, and the thickness used is controlled by
the constraints the engineer provided, the code-specified limits and the detailing requirements.
However, some codes have specific limitations on web plate design. Where these specifications have
been implemented they are described in the technical section.
Important: Where a web plate is specified by RAM Frame it is assumed the plate extends above and
below the top and bottom elevation of the beam flanges respectively. That is, the web plate does not
stop at the same elevation as the bottom flange of the deepest beam at the joint, but rather extends
some distance below this point. This is important as all checks that considered the contribution of the
web plate assume that the plate is effective both above and below the point at which the beam flange
applies the concentrated load to the column flange.

Beam with End Connections

RAM Frame performs a check of all beams with the following end connections: Standard, Spring,
Custom, Reduced Beam Section (RBS) and SidePlate. Refer to Section 6.19 in the RAM Frame Analysis
manual for details on Beams with End Connections.

2.5.3 Eurocode Criteria

Sidesway
With the Criteria - Sidesway command, the user can indicate whether a frame is Braced, Unbraced or
Partially Braced against sidesway. This affects the method by which the l/L is calculated for the lateral
members. Partially Braced refers to structures that are braced in one direction but not in the other.
When Partially Braced is selected the user must specify the range of member orientation, with respect
to the global coordinate axes, for which the member is to be considered braced.
Modifying the Sidesway criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that
Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

RAM Structural System

20

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria

Effective Length (/L)Factor

With the Criteria - Effective Length command, /L major and minor values are set for the beams,
columns and braces in the structure.
Modifying the /L criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that Code
Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Flange Bracing
With the Criteria - Flange Bracing command, the bracing condition of beams and columns is defined.
Beam flanges can be defined to be braced continuously along the top flange, continuously along the
bottom flange or not braced. Column flanges can be defined to be braced by the deck, by the beams that
frame in within a given angle of a given column face, or not braced.
Modifying the Flange Bracing criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Column Moments
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Column Moments
command.

Joints
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Joints command.

Reduced Beam Section

Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Reduced Beam Section
command.

2.5.4 CAN/CSA S16-01, S16-09

No sidesway criteria are required for the Canadian Design Code, however, performing a p-delta analysis
captures secondary forces that result from sway in the structure. A P-Delta analysis must be performed
prior to selecting the CAN/CSA S16-01 post-processor.

RAM Structural System

21

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria

K Factor
With the Criteria - K-Factor command, major and minor effective length factors are set for the beams,
columns and braces in the structure. The K factor only applies to the calculation of axial capacity for
members loaded with axial load.
Modifying the K-Factor criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that
Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Flange Bracing
With the Criteria - Flange Bracing command, the bracing condition of beams and columns is defined.
Beam flanges can be braced continuously along the top flange, continuously along the bottom flange or
not braced. Column flanges can be defined to be braced by the deck, by the beams that frame in within a
given angle of a given column face, or not braced.
Modifying the Flange Bracing criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Column Moments
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Column Moments
command.

Axial Slenderness limits

With the Criteria-Axial Slenderness command the user can designate whether the program will fail a
member if its L/r exceeds 300 (excludes rods which are allowed to exceed this limit).

Joints
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Joints command.

Beam with End Connections

RAM Frame performs a check of all beams with the following end connections: Standard, Spring,
Custom, Reduced Beam Section (RBS) and SidePlate. Refer to Section 6.19 in the RAM Frame Analysis
manual for details on Beams with End Connections.

RAM Structural System

22

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria

2.5.5 BS5950
BS 5950-1:1990 and BS 5950-1:2000 are implemented. This section describes criteria required by both
code versions. For BS5950-2000 there are additional criteria related to hollow structural sections and
distance to axis of restraint of a beam that are specified in the RAM Manager. Refer to the British Criteria
in the RAM Manager for more information. There are also new tables provided for cold-formed steel
sections as specified in BS5950-2000 and described in the Tables section of the RAM Manager manual.

Sidesway
With the Criteria - Sidesway command, the user can indicate whether a frame is Non-sway, Sway
Sensitive or Non-Sway on Axis. Non-Sway on Axis refers to structures that are Non-Sway in one
direction but Sway-sensitive in the other. When Non-Sway on Axis is selected the user must specify the
range of member orientation, with respect to the global coordinate axes, for which the member is to be
considered non-sway.
For BS5950:2000 the program can determine the sway state of a particular member axis if the Calculate
(Per Load Combination) option is selected. When this option is applied the program will calculate the
lateral story drifts at the position of each member being designed, for each floor. Drifts are calculated
using only the factored notional load cases in each load combination. These drifts are then used to
calculate cr per 2.4.2.6, which if between 4.0 and 10.0 will then result in the member being designated
as a sway-sensitive member in that axis. NOTE that the user will need to have created and analyzed
notional load cases to make use of this option. Refer to the technical section for more information on
calculating cr for load combinations.
These settings affect the method by which the effective length Le is calculated for the lateral members
Modifying the Sidesway criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that
Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Effective Length
With the Criteria - Effective Length command, Le/L major and minor values are set for the beams,
columns and brace struts in the structure.
For columns, the Le/L values can be calculated by the program using Appendix E provisions or can be
specified by the engineer.
The Engineer provides the effective length factor for RHS and I-section beams. If Use LTB (Lateral
Torsional Buckling) Factor is selected then the Le/L factor for the beam will be based on the Le/L
calculated according to the data provided in the LTB section of the dialog. Connection information is
required to determine the effective length of channels subject to axial load. The LTB section of the dialog
is used to calculate the effective length of the unbraced beam for Lateral Torsional Buckling
consideration. This information is required whenever a beam that is subject to bending has an unbraced
flange.
For I, RHS and CHS sections the Le/L factor must be entered directly, for double angle connection details
are required to be input from which the effective length factor will be determined.

RAM Structural System

23

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria
Refer to the online help for additional information on this dialog.
Capacity of Tee and Channel sections is computed based on the connection type per the code. To specify
the appropriate connection type for the T-Section and Channel braces, select the Criteria-Effective
Length Command and choose the appropriate option in the dialog: Two or more Rows of Fasteners or
Two or More Fasteners in One Row.
Modifying the Effective Length criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Flange Bracing
With the Criteria - Flange Bracing command, the bracing condition of beams and columns is defined.
Beam flanges can be considered braced continuously along the top flange, continuously along the
bottom flange or not braced. Column flanges can be defined to be braced by the deck, by the beams that
frame in within a given angle of a given column face, or not braced.
Modifying the Flange Bracing criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Design
The Criteria - Design dialog is used to provide information on the maximum allowable slenderness for
a brace member. This applies to all brace sections subject to an axial compression load. This criteria is
based on the BS5950:Part1:1990 requirement in Section 4.7.3.2 (b) and (c).

Column Moments
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Column Moments
command.

Joints
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Joints command.

Reduced Beam Section

Refer back to the AISC Criteria for a description of the Criteria-Reduced Beam Section command.

2.5.6 Australia AS4100 Criteria

RAM Structural System

24

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Design Criteria

Sidesway
With the Criteria - Sidesway command, the user can indicate whether a frame is Braced, Unbraced or
Partially Braced against sidesway. This affects the method by which the effective length (ke) is
calculated for the lateral members. Partially Braced refers to structures that are braced in one direction
but not in the other. When Partially Braced is selected the user must specify the range of member
orientation, with respect to the global coordinate axes, for which the member is to be considered
braced.
Modifying the Sidesway criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results of that
Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code Check
colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Effective Length (ke) Factor

With the Criteria - Effective Length command, ke major and minor values are set for the beams,
columns and braces in the structure. For columns, the effective length values can be calculated by the
program using the AS4100-98 figure 4.6.3.3 chart or can be specified by the engineer.
Modifying the effective length criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Flange Bracing
With the Criteria - Flange Bracing command, the bracing condition of beams and columns is defined.
Beam flanges can be defined to be braced continuously along the top flange, continuously along the
bottom flange or not braced. Column flanges can be defined to be braced by the deck, by the beams that
frame in within a given angle of a given column face, or not braced.
Modifying the Flange Bracing criteria after a Code Check has been performed will invalidate the results
of that Code Check. The model will be redrawn on the screen in its original colors (rather than the Code
Check colors) indicating that the Code Check must be re-run.
Refer to the Assign chapter for information on how this criterion can be overridden on a member-bymember basis.

Column Moments
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Column Moments
command.

Joints
Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Joints command.

RAM Structural System

25

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu

Reduced Beam Section

Refer back to the AISC Criteria (Section 2.5.2) for a description of the Criteria-Reduced Beam Section
command.

2.6 Assign Menu

The engineer has the ability to assign several design criteria and properties to each individual member.
By selecting one of the Assign commands the appropriate criteria or property can be assigned to one or
more members in the model. The assign options available to the engineer in this mode are typically
organized based on member type (beam, column or brace). All the assign options are described below.

2.6.1 Columns
Size
Selecting the Assign-Columns-Size command causes the Assign Size dialog box to be displayed. From
this dialog the engineer can assign new sizes to any lateral columns. Select the appropriate material
from the material box at the top of the dialog. Select the appropriate size from the size box. For concrete
and other materials the sizes displayed are those sizes created by the user in the RAM Modeler. For steel
sections the sizes shown are based on the member type (column) and the currently selected master
steel table (refer to the RAM Manager). Note that only columns of the material selected in the dialog can
be assigned the size selected.
After a size is selected the engineer can assign the size to a single member (click on Single), to multiple
members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the dialog will close and a
target cursor will be made available. Click on each member to assign the size to. If Fence is clicked the
dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle around all of the
members to assign the size to. Note that sizes are only assigned to columns comprised of the same
material selected in the assign dialog. To return to the dialog to select a different size to assign click on
the right mouse button.

Effective Length Factor

Selecting the Assign-Column-K Factor/Effective Length command causes the Assign K Factor (ASD
9th, LRFD 3rd and Canada) or Effective Length Factor (Eurocode, AS4100 and BS5950) dialog box to be
displayed. From this dialog the engineer can override, on a member-by-member basis, the global
effective length factors specified in the Criteria-K Factor/Effective Length Factors dialog. Select the
appropriate values from the dialog. Refer to Criteria-K Factor/Effective Length Factor section for more
information on the various options. The engineer can choose to override the global criteria in one or
both axes of the member. The criteria are applied to the columns local axes.
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the

RAM Structural System

26

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu
dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on each section to apply the criteria to.
If Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a
rectangle around all the sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel
columns. To return to the dialog to select a different effective length criteria click on the right mouse
button.
To view which member axes are using the global criteria and which have been overridden select the
appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

Flange Bracing
Selecting the Assign-Column-Flange Bracing command causes the Assign Column Bracing dialog box
to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can override, on a member by member basis, the global
column bracing criteria specified in the Criteria-Flange Bracing dialog. The engineer should specify
whether the TOP of the column is braced or unbraced (or should consider the global criteria) in each
axis. This command acts with respect to the top of the column element. Note that if a column is broken
up by an intermediate story such that separate column finite elements comprise the physical column,
then the top of the selected column element will be assigned the specified criteria. When assigning these
criteria the user must be careful to select the correct column.
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). Be careful of using the
ALL and FENCE options for the reason described above. If Single is clicked the dialog will close and a
target cursor will be made available. Click on each column to apply the criteria to. If Fence is clicked the
dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle around all the
sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel columns. To return to
the dialog to select a different effective length criteria click on the right mouse button.
To view which member axes are using the global criteria and which have been overridden select the
appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

Unbraced Length
Selecting the Assign- Column-Unbraced Length command causes the Assign Unbraced Length dialog
box to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can specify on a column-by-column basis whether to
override the automatically calculated unbraced lengths. These can be assigned for each of the two axial
buckling axes (Major and Minor) and the bending compression flange (out-of-plane from bending axis)
for lateral torsional buckling consideration.
By assigning Global to any of the column axes for consideration of unbraced length the program will
automatically calculated the values as described in section 3.1.8. Assigning a specific value to an axis the
program will use that value for the appropriate strength calculation. Assigning a specific value to an axis
the program will use that value for the appropriate strength calculation for every segment of the column
that is checked.
To view which columns have an assigned unbraced length, select unbraced length from the frame
column tab in the View-Members Dialog.

RAM Structural System

27

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu

2.6.2 Beams
Selecting the Assign-Beam-Size command causes the Assign Size dialog box to be displayed. Refer to
the Assign Column Size section for a detailed description of this command.

Effective Length
Selecting the Assign-Beam-K Factor/Effective Length command causes the Assign K Factor (ASD 9th,
LRFD 3rd and Canada) or Effective Length Factor (Eurocode, AS4100 and BS5950) dialog box to be
displayed. From this dialog the engineer can override, on a member-by-member basis, the global
effective length factors specified in the Criteria-K Factor/Effective Length dialog. Select either the
global criteria or otherwise specify an appropriate effective length factor. (Refer to Criteria-K Factor/
Effective Length for more information on the available options). The engineer can choose to override
the global criteria on one or both axes of the beam. The criteria are applied to the beams local axes.
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the
dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on each section to apply the criteria to.
If Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a
rectangle around all the sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel
beams. To return to the dialog to select a different effective length criteria click on the right mouse
button.
To view which member axes are using the global criteria and which have been overridden select the
appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

Flange Bracing
Selecting the Assign-Beam-Flange Bracing command causes the Assign Beam Flange Bracing dialog
box to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can override, on a member by member basis, the
global beam flange bracing criteria specified in the Criteria-Flange Bracing dialog. The engineer should
specify whether the top and or the bottom flange of the beam is braced or unbraced, or whether the
global beam flange bracing should be applied to the beam. The bracing of the compression flange
influences the calculated axial and bending capacity of the beam.
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the
dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on each beam to apply the criteria to. If
Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle
around all the sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel beams. To
return to the dialog to select a different beam flange bracing click on the right mouse button.
To view which members are using the global criteria and which have been overridden select the
appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

Unbraced Length
Selecting the Assign-Beam-Unbraced Length command causes the Assign Unbraced Length dialog box
to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can specify on a beam-by-beam basis whether to override
the automatically calculated unbraced lengths. These can be assigned for each of the two axial buckling

RAM Structural System

28

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu
axes (Major and Minor) and the bending compression flange (out-of-plane from bending axis) for lateral
torsional buckling consideration.
By assigning Global to any of the beam axes for consideration of unbraced length the program will
automatically calculated the values as described in section 3.1.8. Assigning a specific value to an axis the
program will use that value for the appropriate strength calculation for every segment of the beam that
is checked.
To view which beams have an assigned unbraced length, select unbraced length from the frame beam
tab in the View-Members Dialog.

Reduced Beam Section (RBS)

Selecting the Assign-Beam-Reduced Beam Section command causes the Assign Reduced Beam Section
dialog box to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can specify on a beam-by-beam basis whether
to apply the reduced beam section (RBS) properties to the section. The reduced beam properties
assigned to the section are those specified in the Criteria-Reduced Beam Section dialog. By selecting
clear reduced beam section the engineer can remove the application of the RBS from any beam. This
command is only applicable to steel, I-section beams.
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single) or to multiple members (click on Fence). If Single is clicked the dialog will close and a target
cursor will be made available. Click on each steel I-section to apply the criteria to. If Fence is clicked the
dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle around all the
sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to the steel I-beams. To return to
the dialog to select a different effective length criteria click on the right mouse button.
To view which beams have a reduced beam section applied, select RBS from the beam tab in the ViewMembers Dialog.

2.6.3 Horizontal Braces

A distinction is made between horizontal braces and beam members. Horizontal braces are used to
carry lateral forces between the vertical lateral resisting systems; they carry no gravity loads, cannot be
assigned as reduced beam sections and are not braced by any of the gravity beams that they intersect.
Other than these distinctions the horizontal braces are analyzed and designed in the same way lateral
beams are.

Size
Selecting the Assign-Horizontal Brace-Size command causes the Assign Size dialog box to be
displayed. All sections that are appropriate to be used for horizontal braces can be assigned. Refer to the
Assign Column Size section for a detailed description of this command.

Effective Length Factor

Selecting the Assign-Horizontal Brace-K Factor/Effective Length command causes the Assign K
Factor (ASD 9th, LRFD 3rd and Canada) or Effective Length Factor (Eurocode and BS5950) dialog box to
be displayed. Refer to the Assign Beam K-Factor / Effective Length Factor for a detailed description of
this command.

RAM Structural System

29

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu

Flange Bracing
Selecting the Assign- Horizontal Brace -Flange Bracing command causes the Assign Horizontal Brace
dialog box to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can override, on a member by member basis,
the global horizontal brace flange bracing criteria specified in the Criteria-Flange Bracing dialog. Refer
to the Assign Beam Flange Bracing section for a detailed description of this command.

Unbraced Length
Selecting the Assign-Horizontal Brace-Unbraced Length command causes the Assign Unbraced
Length dialog box to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can specify on a brace-by-brace basis
whether to override the automatically calculated unbraced lengths. These can be assigned for each of
the two axial buckling axes (Major and Minor) and the bending compression flange (out-of-plane from
bending axis) for lateral torsional buckling consideration.
By assigning Global to any of the brace axes for consideration of unbraced length the program will
automatically calculated the values as described in section 3.1.8. Assigning a specific value to an axis the
program will use that value for the appropriate strength calculation.
To view which horizontal braces have an assigned unbraced length, select unbraced length from the
brace tab in the View-Members Dialog.

2.6.4 Braces
Size
Selecting the Assign-Brace-Size command causes the Assign Size dialog box to be displayed. Refer to
the Assign Column Size section for a detailed description of this command.

Effective Length
Selecting the Assign-Brace-K Factor/Effective Length command causes the Assign K Factor (ASD 9th,
LRFD 3rd and Canada) or Effective Length Factor (Eurocode, AS4100 and BS5950) dialog box to be
displayed. From this dialog the engineer can override, on a member by member basis, the global
effective length factors specified in the Criteria-K Factor/Effective Length dialog. Select either the
global criteria or otherwise specify an appropriate effective length factor. (Refer to Criteria-K Factor/
Effective Length for more information on the available options). The engineer can choose to override
the global criteria in one or both axes of the member. The criteria are applied to the brace local axes.
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the
dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on each section to apply the criteria to.
If Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a
rectangle around all the sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel
braces. To return to the dialog to select a different effective length criteria click on the right mouse
button.

RAM Structural System

30

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu
To view which member axes are using the global criteria and which have been overridden select the
appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

Unbraced Length
Selecting the Assign- Brace-Unbraced Length command causes the Assign Unbraced Length dialog box
to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can specify on a brace-by-brace basis whether to override
the automatically calculated unbraced lengths. These can be assigned for each of the two axial buckling
axes (Major and Minor) and the bending compression flange (out-of-plane from bending axis) for lateral
torsional buckling consideration.
By assigning Global to any of the brace axes for consideration of unbraced length the program will
automatically calculated the values as described in section 3.1.8. Assigning a specific value to an axis the
program will use that value for the appropriate strength calculation. Assigning a specific value to an axis
the program will use that value for the appropriate strength calculation for every segment of the beam
that is checked.
To view which horizontal braces have an assigned unbraced length, select unbraced length from the
brace tab in the View-Members Dialog.

2.6.5 Sidesway
Selecting the Assign-Sidesway command causes the Sidesway dialog box to be displayed. From this
dialog the engineer can override on a member-by-member basis the global sidesway criteria specified
under Criteria-Sidesway. The sidesway criteria is currently used by the steel design codes and is
therefore only applicable to the steel members. Select the appropriate sidesway criteria for each local
axis of the member (or specify that the global criteria are to be used for that axis).
After the appropriate values are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click
on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the
dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on each section to apply the criteria to.
If Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a
rectangle around all the sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel
members. To return to the dialog to select a different effective length criteria click on the right mouse
button.
To view which member axes are using the global criteria and which have been overridden select the
appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.
This command is neither applicable to, nor available for, AISC 360.

2.6.6 Sway-Sensitive Design Method (BS5950:2000 Only)

For BS5950:2000, selecting the Assign-Sway-Sensitive Method command causes the Sway-Sensitive
Design Method dialog box to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can specify the design
approach to be applied to the member for a specific axis. That is, per BS5950-2.4.2.7 the user can
designate to use the Effective Length approach per 2.4.2.7a. or the Amplified Sway Approach per
2.4.2.7b. For the amplified sway approaches the user can designate to have the program calculate kAmp
for each load combination or to use a specified value.

RAM Structural System

31

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu
For the Amplified Sway Approach if the Calculate (Per Load Combination) option is selected then the
program will calculate the lateral story drift at the position of each member being designed (for all
floors), for only the factored notional loads in the load combination. For that specific combination the
drifts are then used to calculate cr per 2.4.2.6 and in turn are used to calculate kAmp per 2.4.2.7b.1.
Note that the user will need to create and analyze notional load cases to make use of this option. Refer to
the technical section for more information on calculating cr for load combinations.
The sway-sensitive design method criteria are only used by the BS5950:2000 steel design codes and
ONLY if p-delta analysis was not performed.
Select the axis checkbox to make an assignment to a specific member axis. After the appropriate values
are specified the engineer can assign the criteria to a single member (click on Single), to multiple
members (click on Fence) or to all members (click on All). If Single is clicked the dialog will close and a
target cursor will be made available. Click on each section to apply the criteria to. If Fence is clicked the
dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle around all the
sections to apply the criteria to. Note that the criteria are only assigned to steel members.
To view what sway sensitive design method is assigned to each member select the appropriate option
from the View-Members Dialog.

2.6.7 Frame Numbers

Selecting the Assign-Frame Numbers command causes the Assign Lateral Frame Numbers dialog box
to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can assign frame numbers to Lateral Frame members. The
primary purpose of the frame numbers is to group frame members for output purposes, but they may
have design implications as in the case of seismic special provisions (refer to Seismic Provisions
Chapter).
Enter a number in the Frame Number edit box to assign to members. Select the member types to assign
this frame number to by clicking the appropriate option box under the Assign To area. Note that
different member types, within the same frame, can be assigned different numbers.
After the appropriate frame numbers and member types values are specified, the engineer can assign
the criteria to a single member (click on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members
(click on All). If Single is clicked the dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on
each section to assign the Frame Number to. If Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor
will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle around all the members to assign the Frame Number
to.
To view member frame numbers select the appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

2.6.8 Process Menu

The Standard Steel Post Processor has four actions that can be selected from the Process menu. These
include Member View/Update, Joint View/Update, Member Code Check and Joint Code Check. In
addition there is a link between the RAM Baseplate program and RAM Frame that is exposed in this
menu if v1.5 or later of RAM Baseplate is installed.

RAM Structural System

32

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu

Member View/Update
The Process-Member View/Update command is a powerful feature that allows the user to view
detailed results of the stress and capacity checks based on the currently selected steel design code (in
the Criteria-Code command). If desired the member size and yield strength can be modified and the
Code Check repeated. The modified data can then be saved to the database without requiring returning
to the RAM Modeler.
When the View/Update command is issued, the target cursor appears with which the user selects the
frame member on which the Code Check is to be performed. The steel standard provision member Code
Check is then performed on the member selected. The check is performed for all generated and userdefined load combinations that are selected, and the results, along with other member data, are
displayed in a dialog box. The header of this dialog box provides information about the frame member
selected: floor type, member number, story level, and span coordinates.
The currently assigned member size appears in the top box of the Member Sizes box with other
available sizes listed below it. The yield strength (Fy, fy, or py) is also displayed. The results of the Code
Check, in terms of an interaction equation value, appear at the bottom of the dialog box. If the
interaction equation value is less than 1.0 the value appears in black and the stop light is green; if the
interaction equation value is greater than 1.0 the value appears in red and the stop light is red,
indicating that the member fails.
Changes can be made to the member size by selecting any size in the list or to the yield strength by
editing the value, and the member Code Check re-run by clicking the Analyze button. The interaction
equation value and the stoplight will be updated based on the results of the new Code Check. The
modified member size and yield strength can be saved to the database using the Update Data Base
button. When the database is changed in this way, the status indicator light at the right end of the status
bar turns yellow. The model should be reanalyzed to calculate an accurate distribution of forces.
The View Results button causes the Member Code Check output to appear on the screen. It is a detailed
report of the Code Check results. The report includes design parameters and criteria, the controlling
load combinations, calculated stresses and capacities, and the interaction equation results.

Member Code Check

The Process - Member Code Check command causes the stress and capacity checks based on the
currently selected steel code, to be run on all steel frame members. The Code Check is performed for all
generated and user-defined load combinations that are selected.
Once the Code Check is complete, the model is drawn on the screen with members color-coded to
indicate the degree of stress experienced by each member as determined by the Interaction Equations.
A color chart correlates member color with Interaction Equation values. This display reflects the
controlling condition for each member based on the load combination specified for the load cases
analyzed.
Click the Show Values button in the legend to display the interaction values directly on the members.

Joint View/Update
The Process-Joint View/Update command is a powerful feature that allows the user to check the
capacity of an I-Section steel column at a moment (rigid) frame joint to resist the applied loads without
requiring stiffeners or web plates. Design checks are based on the currently selected steel design code
(in the Criteria-Code command). If desired, the columns size and yield strength can be modified and the

RAM Structural System

33

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu
Code Check repeated. The modified data can then be saved to the database without requiring returning
to the RAM Modeler.
Selecting Joint View/Update causes the target cursor to appear. Click the cursor near a steel joint. This
will cause the Joint View/Update dialog box to appear. The joint will be rendered in the dialog and the
code check results displayed both in text and on the graphic. The header of this dialog box provides
information about the joint selected: its floor type, number, story level, and plan coordinates.
The assigned column size is displayed in the Column Size dropdown. A new member size or new yield
strength value can be analyzed by selecting the new size from the dropdown control or by entering a
new yield strength value in the edit box and then issuing the Analyze command. Immediately after a
new size has been selected or yield strength modified, but before Analyze is invoked, the stoplight will
light up yellow and the joint results will be cleared. Once an analysis has been performed, if the joint can
be adequately designed, the stoplight will light up green and new results will appear in black. If it does
not pass the code check, the stoplight will light up red and the appropriate error message will be
displayed.
To view a detailed report of the joint code check, click the View Results button. This includes Input
Design Parameters, Controlling Load Combinations, and calculated values. A print out of this report is
available when the report is displayed or by using the Reports - Member Code Check command.
Once a satisfactory joint column member has been found, click the Update Database button to save it.
Notice that when a new size is saved to the database the status indicator light turns yellow and a
reanalysis is suggested to obtain accurate member forces.

Joint Code Check

The Process-Joint Code Check command causes all lateral I-Section moment (rigid) connection joints
to be evaluated based on the selected steel design specification. The Code Check is performed for all
generated and user-defined load combinations that are selected. Refer to the technical section for the
criteria by which the joints are validated and checked. No joint code check is performed for hanging
columns.
Once the Code Check is complete, the model is drawn on the screen with the joints color-coded
indicating if the joint requires reinforcing and if a web plate and stiffener could be adequately designed.
A color legend correlates joint color with the code check status values.

2.6.9 The Design Process

In RAM Frame an iterative process is used to quickly hone in on an optimal steel frame design.
Initial member sizes are assigned to frame members in the RAM Modeler, or for steel beams and
columns, by performing a Design All in the RAM Steel Beam and Column Design module.
Load cases are defined and an initial analysis is run in Analysis mode. The engineer switches to SteelStandard Provision mode, selects a steel design code and performs a member and/or joint code check.
For the member code check the color-coding identifies over- and under-stressed members. The
members can then be investigated on an individual basis, and resized using the View/Update command
until a suitable design is found. The new size is then saved to the database using the Update Database
command in View/Update. Sizes can also be assigned to members using the assign size commands (from
the Assign-Beam/Column/Brace-Size command) in this mode.

RAM Structural System

34

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu
For the joint code check the color-coding of the joints identifies which joints could be checked, and if
checked which required reinforcing. The joints can then be investigated on an individual basis, and the
column at the joint resized using the View/Update command, until no joint reinforcing is required. The
new size is then saved to the database using the Update Database command in View/Update. Sizes can
also be assigned to columns using the assign size commands in this mode (from the Assign-ColumnSize command).
Once the interaction equation values for all members are within acceptable limits, and all joints are
suitably reinforced, the structure should be reanalyzed in Analysis Mode. This is to obtain a valid
analysis (member forces) based on the new sizes. Once reanalyzed member and joint code check should
once again be invoked. It is possible that some members will again be overstressed or under-stressed, or
some joints requiring to be reinforced when they were adequate before. This is because of the
redistribution of forces caused by the new sizes. If so, they can be modified once again with the View/
Update command, and the process repeated.
This process of analyzing, Code Checking and modifying is repeated until all members are within the
limits acceptable to the engineer.

2.6.10 Exiting and Changing Modes

To switch to Analysis Mode:
Select the Mode-Analysis-Load Cases command. Alternatively select Analysis from the Mode
dropdown control available on the dialog bar below the toolbar.
To switch to Steel-Seismic Provision Mode:
Select the Mode-Steel-Seismic Provisions command. Alternatively, select the Seismic Provision
item from the dropdown control on the dialog bar below the toolbar.
To exit RAM Frame:
Double clicking the Control Bar in the upper left corner of the RAM Frame Window or alternatively
click the Control Bar and selecting the Close command from the drop down menu.
Select the File - Exit command.

RAM Structural System

35

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

36

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Code-check capabilities are available for steel members and moment frame joints. The standard
provision checks include checking the member allowable stresses and capacities for all applied loads,
including seismic. These checks do not include the additional seismic detailing and strength checks
required by several building codes. These additional checks are performed in the steel seismic provision
mode.

3.1 General
The following provisions apply to all steel design codes unless explicitly noted otherwise. Refer to the
technical notes for each steel design code for requirements specific to those codes.

3.1.1 Steel Design Codes

RAM Frame Steel Design is based on the requirements of several U.S. and international steel design
specifications. These specifications include:
ANSI/AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (June 22, 2010) , published by the
American Institute of Steel Construction in Steel Construction Manual (14th Edition).
ANSI/AISC 360-05, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (March 9, 2005) , published by the
American Institute of Steel Construction in Steel Construction Manual (13th Edition).
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design (June 1, 1989) ,
published by the American Institute of Steel Construction in Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable
Stress Design (9th Edition). The requirements of Supplement No. 1 (December 17, 2001) are also
included as an option in joint design.
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (December 27, 1999) ,
published by the American Institute of Steel Construction in Manual of Steel Construction - Load and
Resistance Factor Design (3rd Edition).
Design of Steel Structures, CAN/CSA S16-09, publish by the Canadian Standards Association,
September 2009
Limit States Design of Steel Structures , CAN/CSA S16-01, published by the Canadian Institute of Steel
Construction, June 2004
Structural use of steelwork in building , BS 5950 : Part 1, Code of practice for design in simple and
continuous construction: hot rolled sections (1990). Some portions of the 20th April 1998, Draft
Amendments to BS 5950 are incorporated as described below.
Structural use of steelwork in building , BS 5950 : Part 1, Code of practice for design: rolled and
welded sections (2000), published by the British Standards Institute.
Structural use of steelwork in building , BS 5950 : Part 3, Section 3.1, Code of practice for design of
simple and continuous composite beams (1990), published by the British Standards Institute.

RAM Structural System

37

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General
Steel Structures , Australia Standard, Building Code of Australia, AS 4100-98, published June 5, 1998.
Includes Amendments No 1-1992, No. 2 1993, No.3 1995 and Draft No.4
Eurocode 3 - Design of Steel Structures, BS EN 1993-1-1:2005, published by the European Committee
for Standardization in Design of Steel Structures (Eurocode 3).
In the RAM Frame program, its outputs and throughout the remainder of this manual, these are referred
to as AISC 360 ASD and LRFD, ASD, LRFD, CAN/CSA S16-01 and S16-09, BS 5950 and Eurocode
respectively. Since the requirements of AISC 360-05 and AISC 360-10 are nearly identically they will
often be referred to collectively as AISC 360.

3.1.2 Steel Shapes

Standard Columns:
I-shape (e.g., Wide Flange)
Square and Rectangular Hollow Sections
Round Hollow Sections
Hanging Columns:
I-shape (e.g., Wide Flange)
Square and Rectangular Hollow Sections
Round Hollow Sections
Channels
Single Angles
Double Angles
Tees
Round Bars (Rods)
Flat Bar Sections (Plates)
Beams:
I-shape
Channel
Square and Rectangular Hollow Sections
Horizontal and Vertical Braces:
I-shape
C-Shape (Channels)
Square and Rectangular Hollow Sections
Round Hollow Sections
Single Angles
Double Angles
Tees
Round Bars (Rods)
Flat Bars (Plates)

RAM Structural System

38

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General
Note: For Double Angles, Single Angles, Tees, Round Bars and Flat Bars the bending capacities are not
calculated (effectively 0.0). For Single Angles, Round and Flat Bars the axial compression capacity is not
calculated (effectively 0.0).
If a section that has an axial compressive capacity of 0.0 has been assigned to a member that takes a
compressive force in RAM Frame Analysis, an error message will be given to the user in both the View/
Update dialogue and the Member Code Check report. Likewise, an error will be generated if a section
that has a bending capacity of 0.0 is assigned to a member that takes a moment in the RAM Frame
analysis. It should be noted that these error messages are based on the forces in the respective member,
not on whether an actual Tension-Only assignment has been made to the member.

3.1.3 Load Combinations

The load combinations required by the specified Building Code or Standard are generated automatically
by the program. The user can have the program generate the combinations specified by the AISC
Specifications, or the more detailed combinations specified by ASCE 7, IBC, BOCA, SBC, UBC, Eurocode,
CAN/CSA S16-01, S16-09, AS/NZS 1170 and BS 5950. See the Load Combination Generator manual for
more information.
In generated combinations, the load factors are normalized so that all combinations are compared
against an allowable interaction equation value of 1.00 (this only affects some earlier implementations
of ASD where a one-third stress increase was allowed rather than using an allowable interaction
equation value of 1.33, the relevant combinations are multiplied by 0.75).
Dynamic and Other load cases are not included in the generated combinations but can by used in
combinations created by the user. The user can create any number of additional load combinations.
When creating user-specified load combinations, the plus and minus combinations should both be
explicitly created. The load factors should be normalized as explained above.
Refer to the appropriate design code in Member Code Check for more information on each codes
specific load combination requirements.

3.1.4 Sloping Beams

Sloping beams in the model will directly affect the member code check when a member is subject to
gravity loads. In the Steel Standard Provisions the design of sloping beams will consider the varying
axial load that exists along the length of the member when carrying vertical gravity loads. the following
figure illustrates the axial force in the beams local longitudinal axis for both a sloped and a horizontal
beam when carrying a gravity load.

RAM Structural System

39

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General

Uniform Gravity Loads

T
Axial Force Diagrams
No Axial Force
C

As illustrated, only the sloped member will experience the axial force due to a vertical load. When
performing a design of a sloped beam in RAM Frame each unbraced segment of the beam is checked for
a minimum of two sets of forces. One set consists of the maximum bending moments in the segment
along with the maximum axial load in the segment, and the other set consists of the maximum bending
moments in the segment along with the minimum axial load in the segment. Although the maximum and
minimum axial load may not occur as the same location as the maximum moment, it is conservative to
consider them as such for design purposes. Note that the unbraced segment refers to the length of beam
in which the compression flange is unbraced for lateral torsional buckling (bending) consideration.

3.1.5 Cross Section Classification

For CAN/CSA S16-01, S16-09, BS 5950, and Eurocode, sections are classified as Class 1 (Plastic), Class 2
(Compact), Class 3 (Semi-compact), or Class 4 (Slender) based on member dimensions and applied
loads. For US and Australia design codes, sections are classified as compact, non-compact or slender.
The following rules apply to the classification of all members (except for AS4100, where the effective
section modulus is calculated for bending according to AS4100-98 Section 5.2):
Cross sections are classified as plastic, compact or semi-compact. No consideration is given to
slender (Class 4) sections. Sections of class 4 (slender) will be flagged and reported as an error.
Sections subject to axial tension load only are classified as Class 1.
Each element (flange, web) of a section is evaluated independently. The highest element class value
will be assigned to the member as a whole.
Any element (flange or web) required to resist axial compression load will be evaluated to determine
into which class the element falls.
Any element (flange or web) required to resist axial tension load only will be assumed to be class 1.
Any element fully supported (e.g. a fully braced flange) will not be considered in determining the
section class value.
A flange element that carries tension due to bending moment will be Class 1 unless the section is
under sufficient axial compression force to locate the plastic neutral axis within the tension flange. In
this case the flange will be evaluated as if it were in complete axial compression.
The flanges of a flange section subject to minor axis bending will be evaluated assuming full
compression on each flange.

RAM Structural System

40

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General
Webs are considered as Class 1 if the section is only subject to axial tension or only minor axis
moment (or a combination of these), otherwise the code evaluation rules are followed.
Hollow rectangular sections subject to only minor axis bending (with or without axial load) will
cause the web of the hollow section to be considered as the flange, and the flanges to be considered
as webs for class determination purposes.
Double angles are always evaluated using the criteria for Legs of single angle and double angle
members with components separated in table 7.

3.1.6 Torsion
No check is made for torsion, nor are its effects included in the interaction equation results.

3.1.7 Tension Capacity

The tension allowable stresses and tension capacities are based on the gross section properties of the
cross section. No consideration is given to the connector configuration and hence the net section of the
shape.

3.1.8 Compression Flange Bracing

The user may specify a number of parameters related to unbraced length considerations. These criteria
are found in the Criteria - Flange Bracing command. Based on these criteria RAM Frame automatically
determines the braced condition for each member. Unbraced lengths can also be directly specified by
the engineer from the Assign menu as described in section 2.6. If overridden, the assigned values will be
used for all checks on the assigned member. The program checks each unbraced segment to determine
the controlling condition of moment and unbraced length.
In RAM Frame, in the calculation of axial and bending capacity of a member it is necessary to determine
the unbraced segment lengths. There are four pertinent values: Lu in the major axis for axial, Lu in the
minor axis for axial, Lu in the major axis for bending, and Lu in the minor axis for bending. All four
values are listed in the Member Code Check report for beams.

3.1.9 Major Axis Bracing

For the calculation of the axial capacity and the bending capacity, the unbraced length of the
compression flange in the plane of the major-axis of a beam is determined as follows:

A major axis brace point list is created.

RAM Structural System

41

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General
Important: The following are assumed to brace both the top and the bottom flange in the plane of the
major axis:
Beam ends are assumed to be braced at a support and at a cantilever end.
Beams are assumed to be braced at both supports.
Beams are assumed to be braced wherever another lateral frame beam frames in (even though the
beam frames into the weak axis). They are not assumed to be braced wherever gravity beams frame
in.
Beams are assumed to be braced wherever a brace frames in (such as for a chevron brace system)
and wherever a frame column (but not a gravity column) from above sits on the beam (as for a
transfer girder situation).
The unbraced length of the segment in the strong axis is then taken as the distance between brace
points. This value is used in the calculation of both the axial capacity and the minor moment capacity.

3.1.10 Minor Axis Bracing

Two Minor axis flange brace point lists are created, one for the top flange and another for the bottom
flange.
Important: These brace points are determined in the following way:
Beams are assumed to be braced at supports on both the top and the bottom flange.
Cantilever ends are assumed to be braced on both the top and the bottom flange.
Beams framing into the member brace both the top and the bottom flange, regardless of the relative
depth.
Steel joists framing into the member brace the top flange only. Those points are added to the top
flange brace point list only.
Beams are assumed to be braced on both the top and the bottom flange wherever a brace frames in
(such as for a chevron brace system) or a column from above sits on the beam (as for a transfer
girder situation). This assumes that the Engineer is going to specify some kind of bracing at these
locations, as is commonly done, as such columns do not intrinsically provide weak axis bracing by
themselves.
User-assigned brace points, specified in the RAM Modeler by the user with the Layout - Beams Brace Points command, brace the specified flange.
In addition to these brace points the user may specify that the top and / or bottom flanges are
continuously braced using the Criteria - Flange Bracing command (or using the Assign command on
an individual member).

Beams - Lu for Axial

For the calculation of the axial capacity, the unbraced length of the compression flange in
the plane of the minor-axis of a beam is determined as follows:
The unbraced length is set to 0.0 if the user specifies in the Criteria / Flange Bracing command that
both the top flange and the bottom flange are continuously braced.

RAM Structural System

42

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General
If the user specifies either that the top flange or that the bottom flange (but not both) is continuously
braced, the member is not assumed to be fully braced under axial load; RAM Frame does not consider
continuous bracing of a single flange by itself sufficient to brace the member under axial loads.
Otherwise, the unbraced length is the distance between points where there is both a top flange physical
brace point and a bottom flange physical brace point at the same location. If there are both top and
bottom flange brace points but they do not coincide, the program uses the greater of the distance
between top flange brace points and bottom flange brace points.

Beams - Lu for Bending

For the calculation of the moment capacity, the unbraced length of the compression flange
in the plane of the minor-axis of a beam is determined as follows:
Except as explained below, the unbraced length is determined the same as is described in Section
Compression Flange Bracing in RAM Steel Beam Design, including the effect that the Consider Point of
Inflection option has.
When determining the moment capacity associated with a moment at a given point, if the flange that is
in compression at that point is braced based on the Top Flange Continuously Braced or Bottom Flange
Continuously Braced criteria or assignment, the unbraced length is set to 0.0.

Columns - Unbraced Length

For columns the user may indicate whether or not the Deck braces the column. This option is only
applicable for Integrated models. If a particular column is outside the deck perimeter it is not
considered to be braced by the deck regardless of the selection for this option. Bracing is also provided
by beams that frame into the column. The user may indicate the maximum angle from a given column
axis that a beam is considered to be providing bracing to the column. If the angle between the beam and
the column axis exceeds the value selected, the beam is not considered to provide bracing to the column
in that axis.
In the case of a column that slopes between two levels at which the column is braced, the un-braced
length will be considered the (sum of) actual length of the column(s), NOT just their vertical height
between end point elevations.
Also, where more than one column slopes to the same point at a story all the columns that intersect
(above and below the intersecting story) will be considered braced at this intersection in BOTH axis.
The engineer can override these calculated unbraced lengths if they are not what are desired
Note that these criteria can be overridden on a member-by-member basis using the Assign menu. Also,
the member unbraced length can also be directly specified by the engineer through the AssignColumns-Unbraced Length command. If not directly assigned the column unbraced length is the
distance between braced levels for a given axis. If a particular level is unbraced, the program will sum
the story heights as necessary to determine the unbraced length.

3.1.11 User Assigned Unbraced Length

As described in the specific member type sections of section 2.6 the engineer can assign an unbraced
length for axial and bending design consideration. This length will override the default calculated value

RAM Structural System

43

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

General
and be used for ALL unbraced segments considered in the design of beams, columns and braces. The
user should be careful to assign an appropriate controlling unbraced length to be considered for the
entire section.
Lateral torsional buckling is typically only an issue for members bending in the major axis plane and
buckling perpendicular to that axis. However, for some codes and section shapes, such as a square
hollow section, this limit state also applies to bending in the minor axis buckling in the plane of the
major axis of the section. There is no explicit override of the bending (LTB) unbraced length for this
minor axis bending case, but the assigned major axis axial unbraced length is used to determine this
length. If the major axis axial unbraced length is overridden this value will also be assigned to the lateral
torsional buckling limit.

3.1.12 Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Tees

In the calculation of the allowable compression capacity of Tee sections, the limit state of flexuraltorsional buckling is checked per the AISC 360 ASD and LRFD requirements but is not considered for
ASD 9th or LRFD 3rd. In those Specifications the E3 Commentary says that this check is typically not
required for most common Tee shapes.

3.1.13 Horizontal Braces

Horizontal braces are designed the same way as beams are in the RAM Structural System, with one
major exception. Unlike beams the horizontal braces are not considered braced by gravity beams that
cross the horizontal brace. Any user defined brace points will be considered in the design.

3.1.14 Column Moments

With the Criteria Column Moments command the user can specify the portion of the calculated
Gravity load moments to be included in the design of the columns. The purpose of this command is to
reduce or eliminate the Gravity load moments on the columns. For the Live and Roof Loads, this
reduction is in addition to any Live Load Reduction calculated for the column. This does not have any
impact on the axial load in the column, and it does not have any impact on the beam design forces.
One application of this command is when the so-called Type 2 connection or Wind connection design
methodology is being employed, wherein it is assumed that the beam-to-column connection acts as a
moment connection under wind loads, but acts as a pinned connection under gravity loads. It allows the
user to specify that the Gravity load moments on the column be ignored, while considering the full
design axial forces. This command has no impact on Wind or Seismic moments and axial forces. The
beam design moments are not affected by this command; beams must be investigated as necessary.
Note that this is not a true Partially Restrained analysis; the values specified by the user do not
represent some type of joint softening or joint capacity; there is no redistribution of the column
moments into the beam. This command merely causes the program to ignore a portion of the column
gravity moments, and therefore, must be used cautiously.

RAM Structural System

44

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
This command only impacts the calculation of the design moments when performing a Code Check on
the column. It does not impact the values shown for the Member Forces listed in any reports elsewhere
in the program.

3.1.15 Kinked Column Equivalent Uniform Moment

A kinked column is defined as a column that extends unbraced through more than one story and is not
braced by the slab or another member at the level that the column bends (is kinked). For these columns
the unbraced length is taken as the entire length of the column (sum of individual column lengths) and
an equivalent Uniform Moment factor (AISC-Cb, BS5950 mLTB, CAN W2, Euro - LTB, AS - m) is
considered to equal 1.0.

3.2 Member Code Check

This section describes the code specific design criteria and design checks.

3.2.1 AISC 360 (ASD and LRFD)

Direct Analysis Method
AISC 360-10 and AISC 360-05 contain specific requirements regarding the analysis of the lateral frames.
Three methods are listed: The Effective Length Method, the First-Order Analysis Method, and the Direct
Analysis Method. Generally any of the three approaches is acceptable, but if the ratio of the 2nd -order
drift to 1st -order drift is greater than 1.5 (based on a model with nominal member properties), the
Direct Analysis Method is required. The Direct Analysis Method, found in Appendix 7 of the Specification
of the AISC 360-05 specification, is implemented in the program. See Section C2-1b in Chapter 2 and
Appendix 7 in AISC 360-05 for further information. In the AISC 360-10 specification, the method can be
found in Chapter C.
The Direct Analysis Method requires:
2nd order analysis (such as an iterative 2nd order analysis or amplified 1st order analysis), including
both P- and P-
Notional loads
Reduced flexural and axial stiffness

2nd Order Analysis

To account for the P- effects, the user has the option of either performing a p-delta analysis based on
the geometric stiffness method (see the section titled P-Delta Effects in the Technical Notes chapter in
the RAM Frame Analysis manual) or by specifying that the B2 factor be calculated and applied
(amplified 1st order analysis).

RAM Structural System

45

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
To account for the P- effects, the user should specify that the B1 factor be calculated and applied
(amplified 1st order analysis).
The advantage to these methods (geometric stiffness and amplified 1st order analysis) is that they do
not require an iterative analysis and allow the analysis of individual load cases, with the results
combined in the load combinations (the principle of superposition can be used).

2nd Order Analysis by Geometric Stiffness Method

In Criteria General in RAM Frame Analysis mode there is an option to perform a P-delta analysis. This
analysis employs the geometric stiffness method. The masses used in this analysis are those assigned as
part of the floor and roof loads, and self-weight if that option was selected. The mass values are listed in
the Loads Masses command in RAM Frame Analysis mode. Those masses are also used in the
calculation of building periods and modes and for the generation of seismic story forces. Therefore,
those values generally only include the masses associated with Dead Loads. In order to perform an
appropriate P-delta analysis the effects of Live Load should be included, therefore a P-delta Factor
should be specified such that the factored Mass values are approximately equivalent to the combined
Dead and Live Loads. Furthermore, in order for the principle of superposition to be valid, the P-delta
effects should be determined at an ultimate value of loads. Thus the P-delta Factor should be
additionally increased to account for the load factors.
For example, assume that the Dead Load and Live Load are approximately equal; this means that the
Mass value should be factored by 2 for the P-delta analysis in order to account for the effects of both the
Dead and Live Load. For LRFD the mass should be further factored by the load combination factors,
which for the most conservative combination is 1.2 on both the Dead Load and 1.6 on the Live Load, for
an average in this example of 1.4 (note that if the Live Load is greater than the Dead Load, this value
should be greater than 1.4, if the Live Load is less than the Dead Load, this value could be less than 1.4).
Thus the P-delta factor that should be specified is (1.4)(2.0) = 2.8 For ASD the mass should be similarly
factored (1.0 would not be appropriate, 1.6 has been conservatively recommended, hence the P-delta
Factor would be (1.6)(2.0) = 3.2). These factors can be refined as appropriate.
An additional benefit of utilizing the P-delta analysis as described is that the effects of leaning columns
(e.g., the gravity columns that are leaning on the frames for lateral stability) are automatically accounted
for.

2nd Order Analysis by Amplified 1st Order Analysis

The requirement to perform a second-order analysis is satisfied by performing a first-order analysis and
calculating and applying B1 and B2 factors to the design forces as outlined in Section C2.1b of the
Specification. Those factors need to be calculated for each load combination. They are applied to the
member forces as indicated in the following equations:
Mr = B1Mnt + B2Mlt

Eq. (C2-1a)

Pr = Pnt + B2Plt

Eq. (C2-1b)

where
Mnt
Mlt
Pnt
Plt

=
=
=
=

the non-translational Moments

the lateral translational Moments
the non-translational axial forces
the lateral translational axial forces

B1 and B2 are defined below

RAM Structural System

46

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
The program assumes that Mnt and Pnt are the moments and axial loads due to the vertical gravity load
cases and that Mlt and Plt are the moments and axial loads due to the lateral load cases.

B1 Factor
The B1 factor is a moment amplifier to account for the P- effects (small P-delta, second order effects
caused by displacement of the member between brace points).
The B1 factor is to be calculated for each member individually, and differs for each combination. B1 is
calculated for each axis of the member:
B1 =

Cm
1

Pr
Pe1

Eq. (C2-2)

where
Cm

Pr

Pe1

Pe1 =

form members with no transverse loading between supports in the plane

of bending:
0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)
for members with transverse loading between supports in the plane of
bending: Cm = 1.0
1.0 for LRFD
1.6 for ASD
total axial load in the member (combined using the appropriate LRFD or
ASD Load Combinations)
is the elastic critical buckling resistance for the member in the plane of
bending:
Eq.(C2-5)

2 EI

( K 1 L )2

where
I
K1
L

=
=
=

Ix or Iy, of the axis for which B1 is being calculated

1.0
the unbraced length, in the axis for which B1 is being calculated

The B1 factor is applied to moments from the gravity load cases (this is based on the assumption that all
of the non-translational moments are due to gravity loads). The B1 factor is calculated for both the local
X- and Y-axes.
Note that it is not required to apply the B1 factors for a given load combination if the following limit is
met for all members whose flexural stiffness is considered to contribute to the stability of the structure:
Pr < 0.15 PeL

Eq. (A-7-1)

where
Pr

PeL

=
=

the required axial compressive strength under LRFD or ASD load

combinations
2EI/L2, evaluated in the plane of bending
1.0 for LRFD
1.6 for ASD

RAM Structural System

47

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
The program applies B1 based on the criteria that the engineer has specified, not based on this
exception, although this exception is checked and reported as part of the AISC 360 Direct Analysis
Validation report.

B2 Factor
The B2 factor is an amplifier to account for the P- effects (large P-delta, second order effects caused by
relative displacement of the member ends). The B2 factor is calculated for each rigid diaphragm, and
differs for each combination. B2 is given as:
B2 =
1

1
Pnt

Eq. (C2-3)

Pe2

where

Pnt

Pe2

1.0 for LRFD

1.6 for ASD
total vertical load supported by story using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, including gravity column loads
the elastic critical buckling resistance for the story; it is permitted to
use:

Pe2 = RM

HL
H

RM

1.0 for braced-frame systems

H
L
H

=
=
=

0.85 for moment-frame and combined systems

the story/diaphragm shear (calculated per load combination)
he story height
the interstory drift (calculated per load combination) and it is based on
the drift at the center of diaphragm masses

where

The B2 factors are found in such a way that diaphragm shear forces and story drift values are first
resolved along member local system and then the B2 factors are calculated according to Eq. (C2-3). Note
that these factors are applied to the axial loads and moments from the lateral load cases.

Notional Loads
Notional loads are required to be applied. They are generated using the Loads Load Cases command
in RAM Frame Analysis mode. If the ratio of 2nd order drift to 1st order drift (i.e., B2) is greater than 1.5,
the notional loads must be applied in addition to the other lateral loads (wind and seismic); if the ratio
is less than 1.5, it is permissible to apply the notional loads to the gravity-only combinations (note that
the value 1.5 is based on a model with nominal member properties. otherwise, it is 1.7 for models with
reduced member stiffness properties). This is specified when the load combinations are generated using
the Combinations Generate command in RAM Frame Steel Standard Provisions mode.
The notional loads are defined as:
Ni = 0.002Yi
where Yi is the gravity load. The values used for the gravity loads at each diaphragm are automatically
calculated, but can be modified using the Loads Gravity for Notional command in the RAM Frame
Analysis mode.

RAM Structural System

48

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
If b used in the reduced stiffness is set to 1.0, it may be necessary to increase the notional load by an
additional 0.001Yi.
Note that for LRFD the notional loads are unfactored for analysis; they are factored in the Load
Combinations. For ASD the notional loads are factored by 1.6 for analysis as required by the
Specification.
Options for these various requirements are available at the time the notional loads are generated.

Reduced Stiffness
A reduced flexural stiffness is to be used for columns and beams:
EI* = 0.8bEI

Eq. (A-7-2)

where
b

Pr

1.0 if P 0.5
y

Pr

Py

Pr
Py

Pr
Py

Pr

if P > 0.5
y

1.0 for LRFD

1.6 for ASD
total axial load in the member (combined using the appropriate LRFD or
ASD Load Combinations)
AsFy

Note that in the second equation given for b the analysis must be iterative since Pr is a function of b,
and vice versa. In lieu of that, the Specification permits the application of an additional notional load
equal to 0.001Yi. The program does not perform any iterations on b, the user has the option of
conservatively specifying a value of b to use in all cases (using the Criteria General command in the
RAM Frame Analysis mode) or to use b = 1.0 and specify the larger notional load. Note that if a value of
b is specified it is used for all members for all combinations, even though in many cases a smaller value
may be permissible for some members for some combinations; this feature is just offered as a
simplification, as an alternative to applying the larger notional load. Although technically b is distinct
for each load combination for each member, the program uses the specified value for all members. The
program does not provide an Assign command to assign different b values to different members, nor
will it use a different stiffness for each different load combination.
A reduced axial stiffness is also to be used:
EA* = 0.8EA

Eq. (A-7-3)

The option to Use Reduced Stiffness should be selected prior to analysis using the Criteria General
command in the RAM Frame Analysis mode.
Note that the program uses the reduced stiffness for all load cases. It is not clear from the Specification
whether the reduced stiffness is required to be used for the drift analysis. Thus, it is up to the engineer
to decide whether or not to run the analysis twice: once for drift with the full stiffness and once for
member design with the reduced stiffness, or once for both drift and member design with the reduced
stiffness.
The reduced flexural stiffness is applied to members whose flexural stiffness is considered to
contribute to the lateral stability of the structure. Thus, it is not applied to members that are pinned at
both ends.

RAM Structural System

49

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
The reduced axial stiffness is applied to members whose axial stiffness is considered to contribute to
the lateral stability of the structure. All lateral beams, columns and braces are reduced for their axial
stiffness.

Load Combinations
Load Combinations for AISC 360 are defined in ASCE 7-05 for both ASD and LRFD. In some cases the
notional loads must be included in all combinations, in other cases they need only be combined with the
gravity load combinations as explained above in the Notional Loads section. In the load combination
generator four options are given for Notional Loads:

Consider with Combinations containing only gravity loads

Consider with all Combinations in direction of lateral load
Consider with all Combinations in all directions
Do Not Include in any Combinations

It is generally agreed that the Specification does not require that the notional loads need to be
considered in all directions (i.e, perpendicular or opposite of the direction of the lateral load case), but
only in the same direction as the lateral load case; however it is provided as an option. In the majority of
cases the Notional Loads need only be considered with the gravity load cases.

IBC 2009 / IBC 2006 / ASCE 7-05

When Roof Snow Loads are used (see the Criteria Member Loads command in RAM Manager)
instead of roof live loads, the user can specify how the snow loads are treated when in combination with
seismic loads. If the Do Not Include Snow option is selected, the snow load case(s) will not be
combined with seismic load cases. If the Use Full Factor on Snow option is selected the normal load
factors on the snow load case(s) will be used when in combination with seismic load cases. In some
cases it is permissible to use a reduced snow load when in combination with seismic loads. If the Use
Reduced Factor on Snow option is selected, the following factors on the snow load case(s) will be used:
For ASD, the normal factor is 0.75, the reduced factor is 0.2. For LRFD, the normal factor is 0.7, the
reduced factor is 0.2.
When the IBC 2006 / ASCE 7-05 load combinations are selected it is assumed that the Wind and Seismic
forces used in those combinations are also based on the ASCE 7-05 requirements, or are compatible
with them.

Allowable Strength Design Combinations (ASD)

The ASD combinations in IBC 2009 and IBC 2006 are based on ASCE 7-05, and are given in Section
1605.3, Load combinations using allowable stress design. Basic and Alternate sets of equations are given.
The template file is RamSteelIBC2006_ASD.cmb. The Alternate combinations of 1605.3.2 are not
implemented. The Basic load combinations used are those given in Section 1605.3.1:
D

(Formula 16-8)

D+L

(Formula 16-9)

D + Lr

(Formula 16-10)

D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr

(Formula 16-11)

D+W

(Formula 16-12)

RAM Structural System

50

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
D + 0.7E

(Formula 16-12)

D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.75W

(Formula 16-13)

D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.75(0.7E)

(Formula 16-13)

0.6D + W

(Formula 16-14)

0.6D + 0.7E

(Formula 16-15)

where E is defined as:

E = QE 0.2 SDS D

(see ASCE 7-05 Sec. 12.4)

QE is the Seismic force from the analysis. is the Reliability/Redundancy Coefficient as explained in the
previously.
This definition of E results in the seismic combinations given in ASCE 7-05 Sec. 12.4.

Load and Resistance Factor Design Combinations (LRFD)

The LRFD combinations in IBC 2006 are based on ASCE 7-05, and are given in Section 1605.2, Load
combinations using strength design or load and resistance factor design. The template file is
RamSteelIBC2006_LRFD.cmb. The basic load combinations are given in Section 1605.2.1:
1.4D

(Formula 16-1)

1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

(Formula 16-2)

1.2D + f1L + 1.6Lr

(Formula 16-3)

1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W

(Formula 16-3)

1.2D + f1L + 0.5Lr + 1.6W

(Formula 16-4)

1.2D + f1L + f2Snow + E

(Formula 16-5)

0.9D + 1.6W

(Formula 16-6)

0.9D + E

(Formula 16-7)

where
E

defined as (see Sec. 1617.1.1)

QE

=
=

E = QE +/- 0.2 SDS D

the Seismic force from the analysis
the Reliability/Redundancy Coefficient as explained previously

The f1 factor may be specified as either 0.5 or 1.0 when the load combinations are generated.
The f2 factor applied to Snow loads when in combination with Seismic loads may be specified as
described previously.
The generated load combinations can be viewed using the Reports Load Combinations command.

Direct Analysis Validation Report

It is the engineers responsibility to ensure that the selection of P-delta, B1, B2, fraction of gravity loads
for Notional Loads and b used in the stiffness reduction are all consistent and correct. To aid the
engineer, a report (see AISC 360 Direct Analysis Validation) is implemented in the Steel Standard
Provisions module of RAM Frame that is available when AISC 360-10 or AISC 360-05 has been selected
as the design code. The report examines the selection of options for P-delta, B1, B2, Notional Loads,

RAM Structural System

51

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
Reduced Stiffness and b, along with analysis results, and reports on the validity of each criteria
selection. If the analysis is deemed invalid, it is the responsibility of the engineer to make the necessary
corrections to those criteria selections, or in some cases to modify the structure so that limitations are
satisfied.

K-Factor
When the analysis is performed conforming to the Direct Analysis Method, the K-factor is allowed to be
equal to 1.0 for all members.

Connector Spacing for Double Angles

For Double Angles in compression, the spacing of intermediate connectors used in the calculation
double angle compression capacity is based on the requirements of E6.2 Dimensional Requirements
which indicates connected to one another at intervals, a, such that the effective slenderness ratio
Ka/ri of each of the single angles, between fasteners, does not exceed three-fourths times the governing
(largest) slenderness ratio of the built-up member. The spacing calculated by this method is adjusted to
ensure equal spacing along the member length. For example, for a member of length 15 feet, if the
minimum connector spacing is calculated to be 6 feet to meet E6.2, the program will identify that to
meet this requirement two connectors are needed, and spacing them evenly along the member results
in a 5ft distance between connectors. This modified spacing is reported in the Member Code Check
report and used for the member design.

Buckling Restrained Braces (BRB)

Braces can be assigned as Buckling Restrained in RAM Frame Analysis mode (refer to Analysis manual
for details). If a brace is assigned as a BRB then the axial capacity of the brace member assigned is
always considered as the plastic capacity of the section adjusted by appropriate strength modifiers (
or ); the compressive strength is considered equal to the tensile strength for the design of the brace.
The output will indicate that the brace is designated as a Buckling Restrained brace.
Braces not originally designated as BRBs are automatically handled as BRBs when a Star Seismic BRB
size is assigned. When the size is cleared through a re-assignment of a size that is not Star Seismic, the
BRB designation is lost. Braces originally designated as BRBs do not lose the BRB designation even
when an assigned Star Seismic size is cleared.

Error Messages
The following error messages may appear during the design process.
KLR > 200 or
LR > 300

Displayed when the slenderness of a section in compression exceeds the userspecified limit of 200, or when the slenderness of a section in tension exceeds the
user-specified limit of 300 (when the user has selected to consider this check in
Criteria-Axial Slenderness Limits).

Pr > Pe1x or
Pr > Pe1y

Displayed when B1 is considered in the design and the axial force on the section
exceeds the elastic buckling capacity of the section. This has implications in the
calculation of interaction values.

Pnt > Pe2x

or Pnt >
Pe2y

Displayed when B2 is considered in the design and the sum of axial forces on the
sections in a diaphragm exceeds the elastic buckling capacity of all the sections in that
diaphragm. This has implications in the calculation of interaction values.

RAM Structural System

52

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
T-O in Bend

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a bending
force following an analysis.

T-O in Comp

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a
compression force following an analysis. This should only occur if the user assigns a
tension-only shape to a member that is then not designated to be tension-only.

A-O in Bend

Some members capable of withstanding both tension and compression forces only do
not have bending capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member
types is subject to a bending force following an analysis.

3.2.2 ASD 9th / LRFD 3rd

Load Combinations
When Roof Snow Loads are used (see the Criteria Member Loads command in RAM Manager)
instead of roof live loads, the user can specify how the snow loads are treated when in combination with
seismic loads. If the Do Not Include Snow option is selected, the snow load case(s) will not be
combined with seismic load cases. If the Use Full Factor on Snow option is selected the normal load
factors on the snow load case(s) will be used when in combination with seismic load cases. In some
cases it is permissible to use a reduced snow load when in combination with seismic loads. If the Use
Reduced Factor on Snow option is selected, the following factors on the snow load case(s) will be used:
For ASD (the normal factor is 1.0):
BOCA: 0.20
SBC: 0.20
UBC: 0.25
For LRFD (the normal factor is 0.7):
BOCA: 0.2
SBC: 0.2
For all other Code options the Use Reduced Factor on Snow option does not apply.
When SBC or BOCA 93 is selected in the AISC ASD Postprocessor, the combinations generated do not
include those with the Av term.
When UBC is selected, the combinations generated do not include those with the 3R/8 term.

IBC 2000 / 2003

When the IBC load combinations are selected it is assumed that the Wind and Seismic forces used in
those combinations are also based on the IBC 2003, or are compatible with them.

RAM Structural System

53

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Allowable Stress Design Combinations (ASD)

The ASD combinations are based on ASCE 7-98, and are given in Section 1605.3, Load combinations
using allowable stress design. Basic and Alternate sets of equations are given. The template files are
RamSteelIBC2000_ASD.cmb and RamSteelIBC2003_ASD.cmb. The Alternate combinations of
1605.3.2 are not implemented. The Basic load combinations used are those given in Section 1605.3.1:
D

(Formula 16-7)

D+L

(Formula 16-8)

D + L + Lr

(Formula 16-9)

D + L + Lr + W

(Formula 16-10)

D + L + Lr + 0.7E

(Formula 16-10)

0.6D + W

(Formula 16-11)

0.6D + 0.7E

(Formula 16-12)

where
E
QE

=
=

QE 0.2 SDS D (see Sec. 1617.1.1)

the Seismic force from the analysis. is the Reliability/Redundancy
Coefficient as explained in the previous section

In combinations with two or more cases in addition to Dead Load, those cases may be multiplied by 0.75
(Sec. 1605.3.1.1). When this factor is applied, the 0.7 factor is not applied to E.
Note that when the 0.75 factor is applied to load cases with E, it is also applied to the 0.2SDS term (which
becomes 0.15SDS) and that when the 0.7 factor is applied to load cases with E, it is also applied to the
0.2SDS term (which becomes 0.14SDS).
If the Roof Load has been specified as Snow in the Criteria Live Load Reduction command in the
RAM Manager, the user may specify whether to use the full factor (1.0) or the partial factor (0.2) on the
Snow load, or disregard the Snow entirely when in combination with seismic forces, as specified in
Exception 2 of Section 1605.3.1.

Load and Resistance Factor Design Combinations (LRFD)

The LRFD combinations are given in Section 1605.2, Load combinations using strength design or load
and resistance factor design. The template files are RamSteelIBC2000_LRFD.cmb and
RamSteelIBC2003_LRFD.cmb
The IBC lists the following combinations:
1.4D

(Formula 16-1)

1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

(Formula 16-2)

1.2D + 0.5L + 1.6Lr

(Formula 16-3)

1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W

(Formula 16-3)

1.2D + 0.5L + 0.5Lr + 1.6W

(Formula 16-4)

1.2D + 0.5L + Snow + E

(Formula 16-5)

0.9D + 1.6W

(Formula 16-6)

0.9D + E

(Formula 16-6)

RAM Structural System

54

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
where
E
QE

=
=

QE 0.2 SDS D (see Sec. 1617.1.1)

the Seismic force from the analysis. is the Reliability/Redundancy
Coefficient as explained previously

If the Roof Load has been specified as Snow in the Criteria Live Load Reduction command in the
RAM Manager, the user may specify whether to use the full factor (0.7) or the partial factor (0.2) on the
Snow load, or disregard the Snow entirely when in combination with seismic forces, as specified for f2 in
Section 1605.2.1.
Note: The 0.5 factor on Live Load should be 1.0 in cases of public assembly loads, live loads greater than
100 psf, and parking garage loads, but that is not implemented. Custom combinations can be created if
necessary.
The generated load combinations can be viewed using the Reports Load Combinations command.

K-Factor
The K-factors for beams and braces are specified by the user using the Criteria - K-Factor command, or
on a member-by-member basis using the Assign menu. The K-factors for columns can be either
specified by the user or calculated by the program. For braced frames the calculated value is always 1.0.
For unbraced frames the calculated value is based on the Nomograph found in the AISC Steel
Specifications. The recommendations contained therein for determining G at column bases is followed.
G is limited to 10.0 for columns when there are no beams framing in, or when only pinned end beams
are framing in; this limits K to a value of 3.0, rather than the theoretical value of infinity. G is limited to
1.0 at the bottom of the column if it is fixed to the footing. Columns that are pinned top and bottom are
given K-factors of 1.0. Knee brace columns are assigned a K factor of 1.0 in the direction of the knee
brace.

Round Bar Slenderness Limits

Per ASD and LRFD Specification B7 the slenderness limit of l/r<300 does not apply to Round Bars in
tension and hence is not considered in the design for this shape even if the global criteria is set for this
check to be considered (See Criteria Axial Slenderness Limits)

Design Yield Strength

The design yield strength, Fy, is the value specified by the user. No reduction is made for thick sections.

Unbraced Bending Length

By default the unbraced length is taken as the distance between brace points. At supporting columns, it
is taken to column centerline. Beams are designed for the forces at two locations within each unbraced
segment: the location of maximum moment and that of maximum shear.

Connector Spacing for Double Angles

For Double Angles in compression, the maximum spacing of intermediate connectors such that the
requirements of ASD and LRFD Specification E4.2 are met is reported in the View/Update dialogue and
the Member Code Check report. The calculation of axial compressive capacity for Double Angles for U.S.
codes considers the limit state of flexural-torsional buckling as detailed in ASD and LRFD Specification

RAM Structural System

55

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
E3. The calculation of the maximum intermediate connector spacing per ASD and LRFD Specification
E4.1 likewise considers flexural-torsional buckling.

Buckling Restrained Braces (BRB)

Braces can be assigned as Buckling Restrained in RAM Frame Analysis mode (refer to Analysis manual
for details). If a brace is assigned as a BRB then the axial capacity of the brace member assigned is
always considered as the plastic capacity of the section adjusted by appropriate strength modifiers (
or ); the compressive strength is considered equal to the tensile strength for the design of the brace.
The output will indicate that the brace is designated as a Buckling Restrained brace.
Braces not originally designated as BRBs are automatically handled as BRBs when a Star Seismic BRB
size is assigned. When the size is cleared through a re-assignment of a size that is not Star Seismic, the
BRB designation is lost. Braces originally designated as BRBs do not lose the BRB designation even
when an assigned Star Seismic size is cleared.

Error Messages
The following error messages may appear during the design process.
KLR > 200 or
LR > 300

Displayed when the slenderness of a section in compression exceeds the code

specified limit of 200, or when the slenderness of a section in tension exceeds the
code specified limit of 300 (and the user has selected to consider this check in the
Criteria-Axial Slenderness Limits).

fa > Fex or
fa > Fey

Displayed when the axial force on the section exceeds the elastic buckling capacity of
the section. This has implications in the calculation of interaction values.

T-O in Bend

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a bending
force following an analysis.

T-O in Comp

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a
compression force following an analysis. This should only occur if the user assigns a
tension-only shape to a member that is then not designated to be tension-only.

A-O in Bend

Some members capable of withstanding both tension and compression forces only do
not have bending capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member
types is subject to a bending force following an analysis.

3.2.3 BS5950:1990 / 2000

Cross Section Classification
For RHS subject to biaxial bending the class is taken as the worst class that results from independent
bending about each axis. For biaxial loading all sides will be considered as both web and flange to
determine worst class. Limits will be from Table 12. Built-up RHS are assumed to be symmetric when
calculating the section classification per Table 12. Unsymmetrical RHS will result in incorrect section
classification.

RAM Structural System

56

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
According to 4.8.1 Circular Hollow Sections (CHS) should be classified separately for bending and axial
load. RAM Frame and RAM Steel Column only calculate one classification for the section that is the most
conservative of the classifications for bending (when it exists) and that for axial load (when it exists)
calculated independently.

Load Combinations
The load combinations are based on Table 2 of Clause 2.4 of BS 5950:Part1:1990. The following
combinations are created:
1.4 DL 1.4 Notional DL
1.4 DL 1.4 Notional DL + 1.6 LL 1.6 Notional LL
1.0 DL 1.0 Notional DL + 1.6 LL 1.6 Notional LL
1.0 DL 1.4 W
1.4 DL 1.4 W
1.2 DL + 1.2 LL 1.2 W
1.0 DL SF1 E
1.4 DL SF1 E
1.2 DL + 1.2 LL SF2 E
where SF1 and SF2 are user specified factors for seismic loads. The default values for SF1 and SF2 are
1.4 and 1.2 respectively. Note that there is no explicit seismic load requirement in the British Code.
However, it is anticipated that users in countries that have adopted the British Code may run seismic
load cases based on some other codes if necessary.

Non-Sway and Sway Sensitive (BS5950-1:2000)

BS 5950-1:2000 Section 2.4.2.5 requires that all structures have sufficient sway stiffness, so that the
vertical loads acting with the lateral displacements of the structure do not induce excessive secondary
forces or moments in the members or connections. Where such second order (P-) effects are
significant, they should be allowed for in the design.
BS 5950 defines two drift limits by which the engineer can determine whether they are required to
consider second order effects on the design of their structure. Section 2.4.2.6 defines a parameter cr
that is used to define whether a structure is non-sway or sway-sensitive for drift in a particular
direction. Note that in the RAM Structural System non-sway is sometimes referred to as braced
against sidesway, whereas sway-sensitive is sometimes referred to as being unbraced (against
sidesway). When cr is larger than 10.0 the code classifies the structure as a non-sway frame and the
second order effects are deemed to be insignificant and do not need to be considered. When cr is less
than 10.0 the structure is classified as sway-sensitive in that direction and secondary effects should be
considered. The engineer can determine whether the building, its frames, and members within those
frames are to be considered sway-sensitive or non-sway, or it can have the program make that
determination. The engineer can create a global criteria for the sway state (Non-sway, Sway
Sensitive, or Calculate Per Combo) and override that global setting on a member by member basis
(See BS5950 on page 22 and Sidesway on page 31).

RAM Structural System

57

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Calculating Sway State per Load Combination

The user can designate to have the program calculate the sway state for each load combination (refer to
Sections 2.5.5.1 and 2.6.5). With this designation the program will calculate cr based on the current
combination for the axis of the member (refer to 3.2.3.4). If cr is determined to be less than 10.0 the
member will be considered sway-sensitive in that axis for THAT one combination. For each load
combination the sway state will be determined and may differ from other load combination sway-states.
If the user selects to have the program calculate the sway state per load combination, and if P-Delta is
not run but a cr < 4.0 is calculated, the program will issue a warning following a design-all suggesting
that P-Delta be performed.

Calculating cr per Load Combination (BS5950-1:2000)

If the user has designated to have a members sway state (see 2.5.5.1) or amplified sway factor - kamp
(see 2.6.6 ) calculated per load combination, then cr needs to be calculated for that specific member axis
for each combination. That is, the program needs to determine the building drift (and hence cr) in the
specific direction of the axis of the member we are considering for the current load combination.
Per the code cr is required to be calculated using ONLY the factored notional load cases in the
combination being considered. The notional loads are required to be applied in the direction of the axis
being considered but the program only generates notional loads in the global orthogonal axes. Also, for
some load combinations (those with lateral load cases) there are no notional load cases. As such the
program needs to determine appropriate notional load cases and factors for combinations that do not
contain them, and the program needs to adjust the notional load factors to achieve a notional load force
that is oriented with the desired direction (member axis).The program addresses these issues as
follows.

Notional Loads in Load Combinations

For combinations that do not contain notional loads the program will determine what gravity load cases
and factors are contained and insert appropriate notional load cases. So for example given the following
load combination:
1.2DL + 1.2LP + 1.3W1
The program will create the following load combination for the calculation of cr: 1.2ND + 1.2NL, where
ND = Notional Dead Load and NL = Notional Live Load.
Note that the original (gravity and lateral) load cases are not considered in the combination used to
determine cr but the appropriate load case factors are.
For a gravity only load combinations, notional loads are typically included automatically. For a
combination such as:
1.2DL + 1.2ND + 1.6Lp + 1.6NL,
The program will remove the gravity load cases to only consider the notional terms as follows for
calculating cr:
1.2ND + 1.6NL
Note that these notional terms are then further expanded as described in the next section to account for
the direction that notional loads are required to be acting in.

RAM Structural System

58

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Aligning Notional Load Cases with a Specific Direction

To determine cr for a particular member axis, the drift due to notional loads applied in the direction of
the axis is required to be calculated. However, the notional loads are currently only generated along the
models global axis, as illustrated below for gravity dead and live notional loads:

NDy, NLy

NDx, NLx

X
Figure 1: Generated Notional Load Cases
Given a specific member axis orientation the program will calculate the correct components of the
orthogonal notional loads to obtain the required force in the direction of the axis of the member
(frame). So for a column major axis oriented as illustrated below (where = 30 degrees), the
components of the orthogonal notional loads required to be applied simultaneously to achieve a 30
degree applied force are as follows:
For Notional Dead: NDx Cos (30) + NDy Sin (30) = 0.866NDx + 0.5NDy
For Notional Live: NLx Cos (30) + NLy Sin (30) = 0.866NLx + 0.5NLy

NDy,
NLy

Required
Force
Direction

NDx,
NLx

Figure 2: Notional Load in Member Axis Direction

Note that when these expanded terms are applied to a load combination such as 1.2ND + 1.2NL the load
combination will expand to the following:
1.2 (0.866NDx + 0.5NDy) + 1.2 (0.866NLx + 0.5NLy)
This will be applied and appear as follows in the generated report:
1.04NDx + 0.6NDy + 1.04NLx + 0.6NLy.

RAM Structural System

59

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Effective Length (BS 5950-1:1990)

There are numerous parameters that can affect the effective length of a member subject to axial load.
The criteria are set in the dialog shown by selecting Criteria-Effective Length, or on a member-bymember basis using the Assign menu.
For columns, the engineer can specify an appropriate effective length factor per Table 24 in BS 5950.
Otherwise, the engineer can specify that the effective length be calculated according to the requirements
of Appendix E. This appendix considers the members framing into the column, and whether a section is
sway-sensitive or non-sway (See Post-Processing Criteria above for making this designation) to
calculate the effective length of the column. The equations used to calculate the Le/L factor are taken
from Annex E in the Draft Amendments for BS 5950, dated April 1998. The structure is assumed to be
comprised of rigid joints where moment connected, and is either fully braced against sidesway
(k3=infinity) or has unrestricted sidesway (k3=0), no partial lateral support is considered. The effective
length factor used to calculate the axial capacity of the column is also used to calculate the lateral
torsional buckling capacity for the beam when subject to bending. The following assumptions are made
in implementing Appendix E:
A column pinned top and bottom (or where all beams and columns framing into the column in question
are pinned) will be assigned an effective length factor of 1.0. This is true even when the column is
indicated as being subject to sidesway.
A column fixed at the foundation will be assigned a k2 value of 0.5 per BS 5950, Clause 5.1.2.4. (a).
A column pinned at the foundation will be assigned a k2 based on a base stiffness equal to 10% of the
column itself. This is according to BS 5950, Clause 5.1.2.4. (b) and results in a k factor of 0.909.
Any other columns, which are continuous but have no rigid connected beams framing into the joint
will be assigned a k value of 0.909, similar to the factor at a pin support per BS 5950 Clause 5.1.2.4.
A beam designated as composite is assumed to carry a concrete slab and the relevant beam stiffness
kb is taken equal to I/L. Per Appendix E.4.1, the beam stiffness for non-composite beams is taken as
0.5I/L if braced against sidesway and as 1.5I/L if not braced against sidesway.
Knee brace columns are assigned a Le/L value of 1.0 in the direction of the knee brace.
The effective length factor for brace members subject to axial load is provided by the engineer for all
shapes except double angles. For double angles, the connection detail must be provided and the
effective length factor is then determined according to Clause 4.7.10.3 of BS 5950. Single angles are not
currently accommodated in the structural system. Capacity of T-Section struts is computed per section
4.7.10. As described in table 4.15 the capacity of the T-Section is affected by the connection
configuration. To specify the appropriate connection type for the T-Section select the Criteria-Effective
Length Command and choose the appropriate option in the dialog that appears as shown below The
Le/L factor used to calculate the axial capacity is also used in the calculation of bending capacity lateral
torsional buckling where a brace is subject to end moments.
The compression capacity of I-section and RHS beams subject to axial load is calculated using the
effective length factors provided by the engineer. For channels, the end connection details are used to
determine the effective length factor according to Section 4.7.10.4 of BS 5950. Double channels are not
currently accommodated in the structural system. In calculating the bending capacity of an unbraced
beam the effect of end fixity on the lateral torsional buckling (LTB) capacity of the section is considered.
Loads are assumed to be normal loads (applied at the shear center). For a segment continuous through
brace points, the Le is equal to the unbraced length. Where a beam is continuous through a column or
supporting girder an effective length factor of 0.7 is assigned to that end of the segment. This is
indicative of the column providing the beam a measure of restraint for bending about the minor axis.
Where a beam is pinned at a support, or where a cantilever tip occurs, the effective length factor is taken

RAM Structural System

60

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
as the value provided by the engineer in the Criteria-Effective Length dialog. The effective length factor
for an unbraced segment is taken as the average of the factors at the segment ends (Refer to Table 10).
For I and RHS struts the minor axis effective length factor can be the same as the effective length
calculated for the segment for lateral torsional buckling if the engineer indicates as such in the Effective
Length dialog described previously.

Effective Length (BS 5950-1:2000)

For design purposes the engineer can select to apply the column effective length factors in the CriteriaEffective Length dialog (See BS5950-1:1990 discussion above), or specify a specific value to be used.
The engineer may specify that the effective length ratio LE/L either be calculated per Annex E or that it
be set to a specific value. Per Annex E the LE/L ratio will be calculated based on whether the column is
non-sway or sway-sensitive. This is true in all cases except as described in the section on moment
amplification below. Refer to the BS5950-1:1990 discussion of Effective length for more detailed
description of the calculation of the effective length factor. The method used by the program to calculate
the columns effective length factor is as depicted in the following figure.
The following discussion regarding effective length for columns assumes that the columns axis sway
state is known. That is, the program knows if a column is sway-sensitive or non-sway in a particular
axis.
For a non-sway axis the program will consider if the user has designated a specific effective length value
or indicated to use Annex E to calculate the effective length. In the case of using Annex E the program
will use the No-Sway Annex E formulations.
For a Sway-Sensitive column axis the program first determines if P-Delta has been performed.
If P-Delta is performed the program will either use the user specified effective length factor (if
assigned) or will use the No-Sway Annex E effective length factors per 5.6.4(b). The No-Sway
effective length factors are used as in this case it is assumed that the amplified sway approach
(2.4.2.7b) is being applied and the kAMP x Ms values will be replaced by the sway moments from
the P-Delta Analysis (refer to Moment Amplification (BS5950-1:2000) ).
If P-Delta is not performed the program will respond based on one additional criteria the user can
assign. The user can designate to either use the effective length factor per 2.4.2.7a or the amplified
sway method per 2.4.2.7b (refer to 2.6.6 Sway-Sensitive Design Method (BS5950:2000 Only) ). If the
effective length approach is selected the program will use the user specified effective length factor or
the Sway-Sensitive Annex E Formulations per 5.6.4(a)/2.4.2.7(a). If the amplified sway approach is
selected the program will use the user specified effective length factor or the Non-Sway Annex E
Formulations per 5.6.4(b)/2.4.2.7(b).
The logic used to calculate the effective length factor for columns is illustrated below.

RAM Structural System

61

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Is the column
sway in axis ?

No

Yes

No
Sway Sensitive

NO: Kamp
M = kampMs + mMns

Column
Effective
Length Choice

Use Annex E

Column
Effective
Length Choice

User Specified

User Provided
Value

Use No-Sway
Annex E

Use 2.4.2.7a

User Specified

Is P-delta
Performed

YES: Effective Len

m>0.85
M = m(Mns + Ms)

Column
Effective
Length Choice
Use Annex E

User Provided
Value

Use Annex E

Use No-Sway
Annex E

Yes
Sway
M=Ms + mMns

Use Sway Annex E

Column
Effective
Length Choice
User Specified

User Provided
Value

Moment Amplification (BS5950-1:2000)

This section addresses the requirements of BS5950:2000 5.6.3 (and 2.4.2.7) that indicates when a
member is determined to be sway-sensitive in an axis, one of two methods can be used to account for
the secondary effects. The first method is to use effective lengths for the columns, and the second
method is to amplify the sway moments in design. In both these cases only a first-order elastic analysis
is required. The engineer can assign which method is to be used for each axis of a member through
assignment (refer to Sway-Sensitive Design Method (BS5950:2000 Only) on page 31).
For frames more susceptible to second order forces (cr less than 4.0) a second order (P-Delta) analysis
is mandated. This analysis should accurately determine the secondary forces that will result from the
deformation of the structure, and will result in member forces following the analysis that incorporate
these secondary effects. Where a second-order analysis is performed the members are designed
according to the amplified sway method as described below. The engineer can indicate that RAM Frame
should perform a first or second order analysis by selecting Ignore P-delta or Consider P-Delta
respectively, in the Criteria-General dialog box in Analysis mode, as described on the Criteria section of
this manual.
The BS5950:2000 5.6.3 indicates that for sway-sensitive frames one of two approaches should be taken
to perform the code check, these are described below.

RAM Structural System

62

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Effective Length Method (2.4.2.7a)

Using this method design forces are not directly amplified. Rather the code stipulates that beams need
to remain elastic and the columns sway-sensitive effective length factors need to be applied. The user is
responsible for ensuring beams remain elastic if this option is used. The user can assign an explicit
effective length factor to the column axis or have the program calculate the appropriate value (refer to
3.2.3.6).
Per 4.8.3.3.4 a lower limit of 0.85 will be placed on the magnitude of mx, my and myx.

Amplified Sway Method (2.4.2.7b)

Using this approach the user can designate one of three methods to determine the amplified sway
moments. By performing a second order analysis, by assigning a specific kamp factor or by requesting
the program calculate kamp per load combination.

P-Delta
The second order analysis method (P-Delta) is available to directly calculate the second order moments
(assumed to be equivalent to kAMP x Sway Moment). By indicating that a P-delta analysis be performed
(see RAM Frame Analysis Criteria) for a sway member, the user is effectively implementing the moment
amplification method. The design assumptions are as follows. For each load combination, design
moments will be calculated for the gravity (non-sway), and lateral (sway) load cases independently.
That is, the sum of all gravity load case moments is stored separately from those of the lateral load cases
in the combination.
Per 4.8.3.3.4 the factors mx, my and myx, are only applied to the non-sway (gravity) moments. That is
terms of the form mM are replaced by Msway + mMnonsway. Note that Msway will already be
amplified as it is calculated from a second order analysis, and no kamp term is applied.
If the effective lengths are calculated per Annex E then RAM Frame will use the non-sway mode inplane effective length factors.
No lower limit of 0.85 will be placed on the magnitude of mx, my and myx .
Using this approach any kamp assignments made to the member are ignored.

Amplified Sway Factor Kamp

If a first order analysis is performed, the user can designate either the effective length method or the
amplified sway method be performed. For the amplified sway method either a specific kamp value is
assigned or the program can calculate kamp per load combination. Similar to the case of second order
design is performed as follows. For each load combination, design moments will be calculated for the
gravity (non-sway), and lateral (sway) load cases independently. That is, the sum of all gravity load case
moments is stored separately from those of the lateral load cases in the combination.
Per 4.8.3.3.4 the factors mx, my and myx, are only applied to the non-sway (gravity) moments. That is
terms of the form mM are replaced by kampMsway + mMnonsway.
If the effective lengths are calculated per Annex E then RAM Frame will use the non-sway mode inplane effective length factors.
No lower limit of 0.85 will be placed on the magnitude of mx, my and myx.

RAM Structural System

63

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
Where designated to be calculated per load combination the amplified sway factor kamp is calculated
assuming cladding, architectural walls etc are not considered in the lateral stiffness and thus:
Kamp = cr / (1.15 cr 1.5)
Refer to the section Calculating cr per Load Combination (BS5950-1:2000) for an explanation of how
the program calculates cr for each load combination.

Design Yield Strength

The design yield strength is the yield strength according to the material grade as defined in Table 6 of
BS5950:Part1:1990 and Table 9 of BS5950:Part1:2000. To assign a grade to a section the engineer
assigns a nominal yield strength (py) to the column section. Based on the magnitude of the nominal
yield strength the section is assigned a grade from the table 6 (1990) or 9(2000). If the nominal yield
strength is within a range of yield strengths indicated in the table then the associated grade is assigned
to the section and the rules relating material thickness to design yield strength are followed. If the
nominal yield strength is not within a range of yield strengths indicated in the table then the design
yield strength is assigned the nominal yield strength value, and no reduction is made for material
thickness. The design yield strength will never be larger than the engineer provided nominal yield
strength.

Unbraced Bending Length

Unbraced length is taken as the distance between brace points. At supporting columns, it is taken to
column centerline. Beams are designed for the forces at two locations within each unbraced segment:
the location of maximum moment and that of maximum shear.

BS 5950-1:1990
RAM Frame calculates the lateral torsional buckling capacity based on the Draft Amendments to BS5950
Structural Use of Steelwork in Building. Part 1:1990, Dated April 20th 1998. In these proposed
amendments the calculation of an equivalent uniform moment factor (mLT) has superceded the
calculation of the slenderness factor n and the old equivalent uniform moment factor (m). The
calculated value of mLT is provided on all detail output. Any section in which the lateral torsional
buckling capacity is larger than the section bending capacity (without LTB) is designed without
considering lateral torsional buckling.
For all sections of class 3 the capacity of the section is considered to be the compression flange section
modulus multiplied by the design yield strength.
CHS and double angles subject to high shear (Fv > 0.6Pv) will be assigned a small nominal capacity. The
shear area required to determine the plastic modulus of the web of an unsymmetrical I-section, when
subject to high shear, does not include the thickness of the flanges.

Bending Capacity (BS5950-1:2000)

In addition or in lieu of some of the 1990 code provisions the following apply to the BS5950-1:2000
implementation.
Loads are not considered destabilizing per 4.3.4. However, in RAM Frame and RAM Steel Beam the
engineer has the option of supplying the appropriate Le factor per table 13 or 14 in the CriteriaEffective Length dialog box.
For lateral torsional buckling per 4.3.6.7 the u and x term are calculated per B2.3, not 4.3.6.8.

RAM Structural System

64

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
The monosymmetry index is calculated per 4.3.6.7. In the case of highly unsymmetric sections,
with values of n outside the range of 0.1 to 0.9, the engineer is responsible for calculating the
appropriate buckling capacity.
For channels, loads are assumed to be pass through the shear center per 4.3.6.7b.
G.2. is implemented for I-sections where the tension flange is fully braced and the program is
calculating the lateral torsional buckling capacity of the unbraced compression flange. When G.2. is
implemented for a beam, the program sets mLT = 1.0 and calculates nt based on the shape of the
moment diagram. In the calculation of Mb in section G.2. there is a reference to the distance between
the axis of restraint and the axis of the beam. In RAM this distance is determined from the distance
between top-of-steel and axis-of-restraint, as provided by the engineer in the RAM Manager (see
RAM Manager Manual). This calculation will only apply where the engineer indicates that the topflange is fully braced. Where the bottom flange is fully braced the dimension is assumed to be half
the depth of the beam.
No option is provided to select that double angles are connected to both sides of a gusset plate by
two bolts in each line per 4.7.10.3 (d), however, the engineer can select (b) to get the same results.
For tension members, no reduction is made for connection detailing per 4.6.3.

Section Capacity (BS5950-1:1990)

For class 1 and 2 members subject to axial tension load, only the alternative equation in Clause 4.8.2 is
implemented. For class 1 and 2 members subject to axial compression load, only the alternative crosssection capacity equation of 4.8.3.2 is performed. The interaction requirements (Clause 4.8) of the Draft
Amendments to BS5950 Structural Steelwork in Buildings. Part1:1990 has been adopted in RAM Frame.
However, all member capacities and the specifications to calculate these capacities are taken from
BS5950:Part1:1990, without modification. This includes the requirement that Mcy need not be
restricted to 1.2Zy for the equations in Clause 4.8.3.3.2.
A flange section is considered an I-Section as opposed to an H-Section when the depth is larger than 1.2
times the Flange Width. This determines which buckling curve is selected from Table 25 for a flange
section. Built up channels subject to compression are assumed to belong to strut table 27(c) per Table
25.
The spacing between connectors of a double angle is calculated to provide a minimum of three bays per
Clause 4.7.13.1. The distance may also be controlled by Clause 4.7.9 (c), which requires the maximum
slenderness of a main component to be less than 50. This requirement is referenced from Clause
4.7.13.1(d). No other provisions of Clause 4.7.9 (c) are implemented, as the double angle is not
considered a battened section. Lamda is calculated based on this maximum allowable connector spacing
and the end connection of the double angle as specified by the engineer (see previous discussion on the
Criteria command) per Clause 4.7.10.3.
As described in the RAM Manager documentation the engineer can specify whether built-up flange
sections are comprised of milled plate or flame cut plate. This designation affects the axial capacity of
the flange sections as specified in footnote 2 of Table 25 in the BS 5950 specification.

Section Capacity (BS5950-1:2000)

In addition or in lieu of the requirements of BS5950-1:1990 these provisions apply.
For class 3 sections the program uses the elastic section modulus in all cases, it does not calculate an
effective plastic modulus as allowed by 4.2.5.1.
Per 4.2.5 Mc is limited to 1.2pyZ for simply supported beams and 1.5pyZ for other continuous
beams. In RAM Frame the 1.5pyZ limit is applied if any one of the ends of the beam are fixed in the

RAM Structural System

65

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
major axis to a column. For the cantilever portion the 1.2pyZ limit applies at all times. NOTE: If the
beam is fixed major axis, but the columns are pinned, the beam will still be considered fixed for the
purposes of limiting Mc. To avoid this situation, always model the fixity conditions of the beams to
represent the true fixity condition of the beam. In RAM Steel Beam the 1.2pyZ limit applies at all
times.

Web Shear Interaction (BS5950-1:2000)

In accordance with section 4.8.1 of the code, if the shear force demand (Fv) exceeds 60% of the Pv or
Vw capacity, then the web shear, bending axial interaction is checked per H.3. There remains some
uncertainty whether the code intended for this provision to apply to rolled sections. However, pending
further clarification, the letter of the code as currently written has been implemented.
A reduction factor () is applied to the interaction equations only where Vw exceeds Pv. To perform this
check, Vw is calculated for the section even in the case where it is not necessary for shear capacity
calculations in 4.2.5.3 (d/tw < 70). In order to compare the section 4.8 checks (with an upper
interaction limit of 1.0) to the H.3 checks (with an upper limit of 1-)2, RAM Frame divides the left-hand
terms of the equations in H.3 by (1-)2. Thus all interaction values have an upper limit of 1.0 for
comparison purposes.
For RHS sections an additional internal moments are applied according to C-3 for strut-action and
J.5.1 for moment amplification. In both these sections the engineer is allowed to reduce the
additional moment depending on the location along the length of the member, relative to the
buckling shape of the member. In RAM Frame the program conservatively uses the full amplification
irrespective of where along the member the design moments are taken from. These moment
amplifications are only performed in the case of uniaxial bending, or where minor axis moment is
less than 2% of Mcy, in the RHS. In all other cases the error message H3. Not Impl is issued.

Error Messages
Class 4

If a section contains a slender element it will be indicated as a class 4 section and no

additional design checks will be performed.

Lamda > ##

Displayed when the slenderness of a section exceeds the code or user specified limit
##.

F > Pcx or F
> Pcy

Displayed when the axial force on the section exceeds the capacity of the section
about the axis indicated by the subscript. This could have some unexpected
consequences in the calculation of interaction values.

T-O in Bend

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a bending
force following an analysis.

T-O in Comp

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a
compression force following an analysis. This should only occur if the user assigns a
tension-only shape to a member that is then not designated to be tension-only.

A-O in Bend

Some members capable of withstanding both tension and compression forces only do
not have bending capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member
types is subject to a bending force following an analysis.

RAM Structural System

66

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

BS5950-1:2000 Specific
H3. Not implemented will be issued in the case of a RHS with bi-axial load when minor axis moment
exceeds 2% of Mcy, and subject to high shear such that section H.3 checks are required (see Web Shear
Interaction above). These H.3 checks are only performed in the case of uni-axial loaded RHS.
Lambda Critical Error: Displayed if there is an error evaluating a specific load combination to
determine cr. This is a result of the load combination being evaluating not containing any notional load
cases (only notional load cases are used to determine cr). Confirm that notional load cases have been
created in the analysis mode and have been analyzed.
Per 2.4.2.7 P-Delta Analysis is recommended: This indicates that due to a large sway the BS5950:2000
2.4.2.7 mandates that a second order analysis be performed, which is not currently the case. This will
only show as a warning following a Design-All if all the following are true:
For at least one member axis the sway state is designated to be calculated per load combination.
For such a member the cr calculated is less than 4.0.
P-Delta was not selected for the analysis.

3.2.4 CAN/CSAS16-01
Load Combinations
The load combinations are based on Table 2 of Clause 2.4 of BS 5950:Part1:1990. The following
combinations are created:
1.4 DL 1.4 Notional DL
1.4 DL 1.4 Notional DL + 1.6 LL 1.6 Notional LL
1.0 DL 1.0 Notional DL + 1.6 LL 1.6 Notional LL
1.0 DL 1.4 W
1.4 DL 1.4 W
1.2 DL + 1.2 LL 1.2 W
1.0 DL SF1 E
1.4 DL SF1 E
1.2 DL + 1.2 LL SF2 E
where SF1 and SF2 are user specified factors for seismic loads. The default values for SF1 and SF2 are
1.4 and 1.2 respectively. Note that there is no explicit seismic load requirement in the British Code.
However, it is anticipated that users in countries that have adopted the British Code may run seismic
load cases based on some other codes if necessary.

Effective Length
All models to be designed with the Canadian design standard must be analyzed using the P-Delta factor.
No sidesway criteria is required for the Canadian Design Code, all structures must consider secondary
moments as determined using the p-delta analysis. As such the K value is typically set to 1.0, however

RAM Structural System

67

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
where the engineer specifies a different effective length the member capacity will be calculated
considering this designated effective length factor.

Design Yield Strength

The design yield strength is associated with the members material grade as defined in Table 6-3 of the
CISC handbook of Steel Construction, Seventh Edition. To assign the grade for a member the engineer
selects the appropriate material type using the Criteria Canada Parameters command in the RAM
Manager. In the RAM Modeler the engineer assigns a nominal yield strength (Fy) to the column section.
Based on the combination of the nominal yield strength and the material type a grade are selected. For
example, a nominal Fy of 350N/mm2 and a material type W results in a section of grade 350W. Note that
a nominal yield strength slightly less than 350N/mm2 will result in a section of grade 300W. If no
appropriate grade is available (based on the user-entered values) then the design yield strength will
effectively be set to 0.0 and NoGrade will be assigned as the grade for the section.

Unbraced Bending Length

Unbraced length is taken as the distance between brace points. At supporting columns, it is taken to
column centerline. Beams are designed for the forces at two locations within each unbraced segment:
the location of maximum moment and that of maximum shear.

Bending Capacity
The effective length of a beam can be controlled by setting the criteria with the Criteria-Design
Defaults command. The specifications of CAN/CSA S16-01 have been implemented with the following
modifications according to the Structural Stability Research Council (SSRC), Guide to stability Design
Criteria for Metal Structures, Galambos, 1998.
For cantilever beams, the effective length is taken as 1.5 times the unbraced length. This assumes the
cantilever tip is restrained against torsion. Omega 2 (2) is taken as 1.0 for cantilevers.
For unsymmetrical flange sections the following equation per SSRC has been implemented to calculate
the lateral torsional buckling capacity:
M cr =

2E
KyL

E I y GJ B1 + 1 + B2 + B12

where
B1
B2

=
=

x
2K y L

EIy
GJ

2 E Cw

( K y L )2GJ
x
d'
Iyc

=
=
=

0.9d 2

I yc
Iy

) ( )

1 1

Iy 2
Ix

distance between center of the top and bottom flange

The moment of inertia of the compression axis about the section minor
axis.

For all sections of class 3 the capacity of the section is considered to be the compression flange section
modulus multiplied by the design yield strength.

RAM Structural System

68

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
Channels are designed using the symmetrical provisions of the design specification with the assumption
that loading is through the shear center.
The loads applied along the length of a section considered as being applied at the shear center.

Section Capacity
As described in the RAM Manager documentation the engineer can specify whether hollow structural
sections are of class C (cold-formed non-stress-relieved) or Class H (hot or cold-formed stress-relieved).
The engineer can also indicate whether built-up flange sections are comprised of milled plate or flame
cut plate. These designations affect the axial capacity of the HSS and flange sections as specified in
Clause 13.3.1 of the design specification.
The calculation of shear area of a circular hollow section is according to Gere and Timoshenko,
Mechanics of Materials, 3rd edition, Section 5.5 as follows:
Av =

3
4

r22 + r12
r22 + r2r1 + r12

where
r1 and r2

the inner and outer radius of the CHS respectively

Connector Spacing for Double Angles

For Double Angles in compression, the maximum spacing of intermediate connectors such that the
requirements of CAN/CSA S16-01 Section 19.1.4 are met is now reported in the View/Update dialogue
and the Member Code Check report. The calculation of axial compressive capacity for Double Angles for
Canadian codes considers the limit state of flexural-torsional buckling as detailed in CAN/CSA S16-01
Appendix D. The calculation of the maximum intermediate connector spacing per CAN/CSA S16-01
Section 19.1.4 likewise considers flexural-torsional buckling.

Error Messages
Class 4

If a section contains a slender element it will be indicated as a class 4 section

and no additional design checks will be performed.

SlenderWeb

If a section subject to shear has a web whose depth to thickness ratio exceeds
the limit of 502 kv / F y then no further design checks will be performed.

KLR > 200 or KLR > Displayed when the slenderness of a section in compression exceeds the code
300
specified limit of 200, or 300 when the section is subject to tension (and the
user has selected to consider this check in the Criteria-Axial Slenderness
Limits).
Cf > Cex or Cf >
Cey

Displayed when the axial force on the section exceeds the elastic buckling
capacity of the section. This could have some unexpected consequences in the
calculation of interaction values.

T-O in Bend

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a
bending force following an analysis.

T-O in Comp

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression
capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is

RAM Structural System

69

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
subject to a compression force following an analysis. This should only occur if
the user assigns a tension-only shape to a member that is then not designated
to be tension-only.
A-O in Bend

Some members capable of withstanding both tension and compression forces

only do not have bending capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of
these member types is subject to a bending force following an analysis.

3.2.5 CAN/CSA S16-09

Load Combinations
The load combinations are based on Clause 7, Factored Loads and Safety Criterion and Table 13 of
Supplement No. 1. If notional load cases have been analyzed, they will be included in the load
combinations. When the load combinations are generated, an option is given to generate the
combinations such that when the load combination contains a lateral load case (wind or seismic), only
the notional load that is concurrent with the lateral load case (i.e., in the same direction) is included in
that combination. If that option is not selected, additional sets of combinations will be generated
containing notional loads acting in each of the four global axis directions for each lateral load case. It
does not appear that the code requires these additional load combinations, so generally the option to
combine only in the direction of the lateral load case should be selected.

Effective Length
All models to be designed with the Canadian design standard must be analyzed using the P-Delta factor.
No sidesway criteria is required for the Canadian Design Code, all structures must consider secondary
moments as determined using the p-delta analysis. As such the K value is typically set to 1.0, however
where the engineer specifies a different effective length the member capacity will be calculated
considering this designated effective length factor.

Design Yield Strength

The design yield strength is associated with the members material grade as defined in Table 6-3 of the
CISC handbook of Steel Construction, Tenth Edition. To assign the grade for a member the engineer
selects the appropriate material type using the Criteria > Canada Parameters command in the RAM
Manager. In the RAM Modeler the engineer assigns a nominal yield strength (Fy) to the member section.
Based on the combination of the nominal yield strength and the material type a grade is selected. For
example, a nominal Fy of 350 N/mm2 and a material type W results in a section of grade 350W. Note
that a nominal yield strength slightly less than 350 N/mm2 will result in a section of grade 300W. If no
appropriate grade is available (based on the user-entered values) then the design yield strength will
effectively be set to 0.0 and NoGrade will be assigned as the grade for the section.

Unbraced Bending Length

Unbraced length is taken as the distance between brace points. At supporting columns, it is taken to
column centerline. Beams are designed for the forces at two locations within each unbraced segment:
the location of maximum moment and that of maximum shear.

RAM Structural System

70

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Bending Capacity
The effective length of a beam can be controlled by setting the criteria with the Criteria > Design
Defaults command. The specifications of CAN/CSA S16-09 have been implemented.

Section Capacity
As described in the RAM Manager documentation the engineer can specify whether hollow structural
sections are of class C (cold-formed non-stress-relieved) or Class H (hot or cold-formed stress-relieved).
The engineer can also indicate whether built-up flange sections are comprised of milled plate or flame
cut plate. These designations affect the axial capacity of the HSS and flange sections as specified in
Clause 13.3.1 of the design specification.

Connector Spacing for Double Angles

For Double Angles in compression, the maximum spacing of intermediate connectors such that the
requirements of CAN/CSA S16-09 Section 19.1.4 are met is now reported in the View/Update dialogue
and the Member Code Check report. The calculation of axial compressive capacity for Double Angles for
Canadian codes considers the limit state of flexural-torsional buckling as detailed in CAN/CSA S16-09
Annex D. The calculation of the maximum intermediate connector spacing per CAN/CSA S16-09 Section
19.1.4 likewise considers flexural-torsional buckling.

Single Angles
Single angles in compression typically have an eccentric connection that induces a moment. The
eccentricity currently cannot be modeled in RAM Frame. However, CAN S16-09 clause 13.3.3 provides a
methodology for ignoring the eccentricity for some configurations. The program assumes that the
general requirements in clause 13.3.3.1 are met. Effective length factors and/or unbraced lengths must
be assigned to produce the modified kL/r ratios per clause 13.3.3.2 or 13.3.3.4.

Error Messages
SlenderWeb

If a section subject to shear has a web whose depth to thickness ratio exceeds the
limit of 502 kv / F y then no further design checks will be performed.

KLR > 200 or KLR

>300

Displayed when the slenderness of a section in compression exceeds the code

specified limit of 200, or 300 when the section is subject to tension (and the user
has selected to consider this check in the Criteria > Axial Slenderness Limits).

Cf>Cex or Cf>Cey

Displayed when the axial force on the section exceeds the elastic buckling
capacity of the section. This could have some unexpected consequences in the
calculation of interaction values.

T-O in Bend

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a
bending force following an analysis.

T-O in Comp

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression
capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject
to a compression force following an analysis. This should only occur if the user

RAM Structural System

71

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
assigns a tension-only shape to a member that is then not designated to be
tension-only.

3.2.6 EUROCODE
Load Combinations
ENV 1991-1 Clause 9.4.5 allows the use of simplified combinations for building structures (Eq 9.13 and
Eq 9.14). These combinations are implemented in RAM Frame. Combinations that include seismic forces
are given by Eq 9.12. The Partial Safety Factors ( Gsup , Ginf , I , and Q ) and Psi Factors (2) for
those equations are specified in the RAM Manager Criteria - Eurocode Factors command. The special
requirement that orthogonal seismic load cases be combined using 100% of one and 30% of the other is
not implemented.

Effective Length (/L)

The Eurocode values for /L is specified by selecting the Criteria-Effective Length menu command, or
on a member-by-member basis using the Assign menu. The effective beam stiffness does consider the
fixity conditions and is reduced by 25% if the beam is pinned at the end (closest node) away from the
joint. The beam length is considered to be the distance from the joint to the closest node away from the
joint. This length is not necessarily the full length of the member but could be the distance from the joint
to the location where a brace or column-from-above intersects the beam. Columns pinned top and
bottom are given /L values of 1.0 in both non-sway mode and sway mode. If a column is continuous but
all beams coming into a joint are pinned, then for that end of the column is assigned a value of 0.95.
This results in a /L of 4.88 for a sway column and 0.96 for a non-sway column. Knee brace columns are
assigned a /L value of 1.0 in the direction of the knee brace.

Design Yield Strength

For steel with a nominal fy less than or equal to 460 N/mm2 and greater than or equal to 275 N/mm2
the design yield strength is adjusted to account for material thickness according to Table 3.1, BS EN
1993-1-1:2005, EN10025-3 rules. Both nominal and design Fy appear on all design output. Steel with a
nominal fy larger than 460N/mm2 or less than 275 N/mm2 is assigned no design yield. For steel with a
nominal Fy outside of the ranges specified no steel material will be found and the section will be
assigned a small yield strength and fail in design. A large interaction value on a design is indicative of
assigned yield strength outside the ranges indicated above. Yield strength depends on the thickness of
the elements (flange, web etc) of the cross section being designed. Refer to table 3.1 of BS EN
1993-1-1:2005 for details on the material and yield strengths for different thickness elements.

Unbraced Bending Length

Unbraced length is taken as the distance between brace points. At supporting columns, it is taken to
column centerline. Beams are designed for the forces at two locations within each unbraced segment:
the location of maximum moment and that of maximum shear.

RAM Structural System

72

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Bending Capacity
In the calculation of the lateral torsional buckling capacity for a section of beam with an unbraced
compression flange the location of load application on the beam can have an impact on the beams
capacity. For the Eurocode the engineer can specify whether the load is applied at the top flange or at
the shear center by choosing the appropriate option in the Criteria-Eurocode Factors command in the
RAM Manager. The elastic critical moment is as calculated in Elastic Critical Moment.

Elastic Critical Moment

Within each unbraced segment the points of maximum moment and shear and the segment end points
are all checked against the segment capacity.
When calculating the member capacity for an unbraced segment the lateral torsional buckling must be
considered. In these cases it is necessary to calculate the elastic critical moment (Mcr).
While BS EN1993-1-1:2005 does not provide exact information on how to compute Mcr, RAM Frame
calculates the elastic critical moment using procedures, described in these articles:
1. SN003a-EN-EU NCI: Elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling
2. M.A Serna, A.Lopez, I. Puente, D.J. Yong Equivalent uniform moment factors for lateral-torsional
buckling of steel members (2006) Journal of Constructional Steel Research, 62.
3. Rubrique du Praticien, Abaques De Deversement Pour Profiles Lamines, Construction Metallique no
1 - Mars 1981.
RAM Frame assumes that the factors k and kw are equal to 1.0. The following procedures are
implemented to calculate the C factors, depending on the beam major axis loading:
Members with end moments onlyaccording to the French Annex:
C1 = 1/(0.325 + 0.432 + 0.2522)
C2 = 0.0
C3 = 0.5(1.0 + )C1
If end moments negative, middle positive, shape of moment is symmetric and there is a straight line
between center and ends of segment use case 4 from SN030a-EN-EU, table 4.2:
C1 = 1.68
C2 = 1.64
C3 = 2.64
If end moments negative, middle positive, shape of moment is symmetric and there is no straight line
between center and ends of segment use case 2 from SN030a-EN-EU, table 4.2:
C1 = 2.57
C2 = 1.55
C3 = 0.75
If end moments are zero and shape of moment is symmetric and there is straight line between center
and ends of segment use values from case 3 SN030a-EN-EU, table 4.2:
C1 = 1.35

RAM Structural System

73

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
C2 = 0.63
C3 = 1.73
If end moments are zero and shape of moment is symmetric and there is no straight line between center
and ends of segment use French Annex formulas based on the procedure detailed in the French Journal,
Rubrique du Praticien, Abaques De Deversement Pour Profiles Lamines, Construction Metallique no 1 Mars 1981:
C1 = C10|Mmax/M|
C2 = 4/2||C10
C3 = 0.525 if ends pinned, 0.753 if ends fixed, 0.64 for one end pinned, other fixed. where
1
1
3
2
2
=
C10
1 + + 3 + 2 2 8 2 1 2 + 8 2 5 2 +

=
=
=
=
=

f
M
L

)(

3
4

4 + - 1
fL2/(8M)
Uniform load
Maximum end moment
Member Length

For all other cases use formula (13) from M.A. Serna article Equivalent uniform moment factors for
lateral - torsional buckling of steel members:
k A1 +

2 1 k
1 k
A2 +
A2
2
2
A1

C2 = 0.0
C3 = 0.0
where
A1
A2

=
=

2
M max
+ 9k M 22 + 16M 32 + 9k M 42

2
(1 + 9k + 16 + 9k )M max

M max + 4M 1 + 8M 2 + 12M 3 + 8M 4 + 4M 5
37M max

Coefficient k is related to the lateral bending and warping prevention at end supports. It is equal to 1 if
lateral bending and warping are free and equal to 0.5 if lateral bending and warping are prevented.
Moments M1 and M5 are begin and end moments respectively, moment M3 is the moment at the middle
of the span, moment M2 is moment on L/4 position and moment M4 is the moment on 3L/4 position.
Moments M1 through M5 must have its corresponding signs.
Note: Values of C for cantilevers are calculated as for all other members as RAM Frame assumes the
ends of a cantilever to be laterally braced.
The output shows the values of: class, the design shear and moments at the indicated beam location, the
segment unbraced length (Lb), the type of moment that controls the member capacity (Mb = buckling,
Mc = plastic capacity, Mv = is shear reduced capacity) and the member capacity. Note that the
controlling condition may not correspond to any of the maximum or minimum moment conditions. This
indicates that the controlling condition occurs in a segment with a lesser moment but greater unbraced
length.

RAM Structural System

74

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

Error Messages
Class 4

Displayed when the section is slender and no design will be performed.

T>100mm

The thickness from a segment (flange, web etc) of a member is exceeds the codes upper
limit of 100mm. No design is performed.

NEd>NplRd

The applied axial capacity exceeds the buckling capacity of the section. The interaction
equations are undefined in this case.

T-O in Bend Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a bending
force following an analysis.
T-O in Comp Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression capacities
calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is subject to a compression
force following an analysis. This should only occur if the user assigns a tension-only
shape to a member that is then not designated to be tension-only.
A-O in Bend Some members capable of withstanding both tension and compression forces only do
not have bending capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member
types is subject to a bending force following an analysis.

3.2.7 AS 4100-98
Analysis Method
AS 4100 contains specific requirements regarding the analysis of the lateral frames. RAM Frame
currently implements the First-Order Elastic Analysis method considering rigid and simple members
according to Section 4 of the specification. All lateral (frame) members of the structure are considered
in a full building analysis (no sub structuring) with spans taken as centre-to-centre of supports. Pattern
loading is considered in the design of all gravity steel beam and columns in their design in RAM Steel,
and for all concrete members in RAM Concrete, but is not currently considered for steel frame members
in RAM Frame. Note that per AS 4100 Section 4.4.2.1changes in geometry and effective stiffness due to
axial load on members is not considered in the analysis.

Second Order Effects

Per 4.4.1.2 of the AS 4100 Second-order effects The analysis shall allow for the effects of the design
loads acting on the structure and its members in their displaced and deformed configuration. These
second-order effects shall be taken into account by using either(a) a first-order elastic analysis with
moment amplification in accordance with Clause 4.4.2, provided the moment amplification factors (b )
or (s ) are not greater than 1.4; or (b) a second-order elastic analysis in accordance with Appendix E
In RAM Frame the user can choose to consider either of these methods. If P-Delta is selected to be
considered in the analysis (see RAM Frame Analysis Manual - Analysis Criteria and P-Delta Sections)
then this is equivalent to 4.4.1.2(b) being considered. Without P-Delta the requirements of 4.4.1.2(a) are
effectively considered. See the next section for a discussion on differences and advantages of the P-Delta
and the Amplified First Order approach.

RAM Structural System

75

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
The following rules are applied to the determination of design moments considering the members sway
status (braced or unbraced) and whether P-Delta was considered in the analysis.
Braced
4.4.2.2: M* = b M*m
Unbraced
4.4.2.2: M* = max( b, s)M*m
PDelta Considered
Appendix E: M* = bM*e
Where:
Calculate db

Braced in Axis ?

M*axis = db * M*m

Calculate ds

P-Delta
Considered ?

M*axis = db * M*e

M*axis = max(db,ds) * M*m

Only design moments are amplified for the secondary affects. Axial and shear forces remain unadjusted.
P-Delta when selected will be considered for all members both braced and unbraced (cannot have PDelta only apply to unbraced members in a structure). These secondary forces will be relatively
small assuming the member is truly braced against sidesway by other frame members in the model.
That is so that there is little lateral displacement of the braced members.
When P-Delta is considered the secondary multiplier (b) is applied directly to the moment
calculated from the analysis. That is the gravity transverse loads are not considered as a simple load
that is superimposed with the lateral load case forces, rather all forces are applied to the structure in
separate load cases and superimposed in a load combination to produce final design forces.
When calculating Nomb for consideration in the calculation of for b the effective length (ke) is set to
1.0, that is the member is assumed braced.

RAM Structural System

76

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check

2nd Order Analysis by Geometric Stiffness Method (P-Delta)

In Criteria General in RAM Frame Analysis mode there is an option to perform a P-delta analysis. This
analysis employs the geometric stiffness method. The masses used in this analysis are those assigned as
part of the floor and roof loads, and self-weight if that option was selected. The mass values are listed in
the Loads Masses command in RAM Frame Analysis mode. Those masses are also used in the
calculation of building periods and modes and for the generation of seismic story forces. Therefore,
those values generally only include the masses associated with Dead Loads. In order to perform an
appropriate P-delta analysis the effects of Live Load should be included, therefore a P-delta Factor
should be specified such that the factored Mass values are approximately equivalent to the combined
Dead and Live Loads. Furthermore, in order for the principle of superposition to be valid, the P-delta
effects should be determined at an ultimate value of loads. Thus the P-delta Factor should be
additionally increased to account for the load factors.
For example, assume that the Dead Load and Live Load are approximately equal; this means that the
Mass value should be factored by 2 for the P-delta analysis in order to account for the effects of both the
Dead and Live Load. For AS the mass should be further factored by the load combination factors, which
for the most conservative combination is 1.2 on both the Dead Load and 1.5 on the Live Load, for an
average in this example of 1.35 (note that if the Live Load is greater than the Dead Load, this value
should be greater than 1.35, if the Live Load is less than the Dead Load, this value could be less than
1.35). Thus the P-delta factor that should be specified is (1.35)(2.0) = 2.7.
An additional benefit of utilizing the P-delta analysis as described is that the effects of leaning columns
(e.g., the gravity columns that are leaning on the frames for lateral stability) are automatically accounted
for.

2nd Order Analysis by Amplified 1st Order Analysis

The requirement to perform a second-order analysis is satisfied by performing a first-order analysis and
calculating and applying b and s factors to the design forces as outlined in Section 4.4.2 of the
Specification. Those factors need to be calculated for each load combination. They are applied to the
member forces as indicated in the following equations:
M* = max(b, s)M*m

Eq. (C2-1a)

where
b and s
M*m

=
=

as defined in the following

the forces produced from the analysis (considers gravity and lateral
forces applied simultaneously)

b Factor
The b factor is a moment amplifier to account for the P- effects (small P-delta, second order effects
caused by displacement of the member between brace points).
The b factor is to be calculated for each member individually, and differs for each combination. b is
calculated for each axis of the member:
Cm

b =
1

N*
N omb

Eq. (4.4.2.2)

where

RAM Structural System

77

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
=

Cm

N*

Nomb

0.6 0.4(M1/M2) for members with no transverse loading between

supports in the plane of bending
1.0 for members with transverse loading between supports in the plane
of bending
total axial load in the member (combined using the appropriate AS/NZS
Load Combinations)
is the elastic critical buckling resistance for the member in the plane of
bending
2
EI
( KeL )2

=
=
=

I
Ke
L

Ix or Iy, of the axis for which b is being calculated

1.0
the unbraced length, in the axis for which b is being calculated

s Factor
The s factor is an amplifier to account for the P- effects (large P-delta, second order effects caused by
relative displacement of the member ends). The s factor is calculated for each rigid diaphragm, and
differs for each combination. s is given as:
s =

1
s N *
1
h s V *

Eq. C4.4.2.3(i)

where
N*

V*
hs

=
=

total vertical load supported by story using AS/NZS load combinations,

including gravity column loads
the interstory drift (calculated per load combination) and it is based on
the drift at the center of diaphragm masses
the story/diaphragm shear (calculated per load combination)
the story height

The s factors are found in such a way that diaphragm shear forces and story drift values are first
resolved along member local system and then the s factors are calculated according to Eq. (C4.4.2.3(i)).
Note: AS 4100 mandates that if s exceeds 1.4 the user should consider applying a second order analysis
according to the provisions of Appendix E. It is the engineers responsibility to select P-Delta for the
analysis in the event that situation occurs.

Notional Loads
Notional loads are required to be applied. They are generated using the Loads Load Cases command
in RAM Frame Analysis mode. This is specified when the load combinations are generated using the
Combinations Generate command in RAM Frame Steel Standard Provisions mode.
The notional loads are defined as:
Ni = 0.002Yi
where Yi is the gravity load. The values used for the gravity loads at each diaphragm are automatically
calculated, but can be modified using the Loads Gravity for Notional command in the RAM Frame
Analysis mode.

RAM Structural System

78

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
Note: The notional loads are unfactored for analysis; they are factored in the Load Combinations.
Options for these various requirements are available at the time the notional loads are generated.

Design Yield Strength

The design yield strength is a function of both the material and the element thickness properties of the
section. The user provided Nominal Yield Strength (Fy) is first mapped to an appropriate material
according to Table 2.1 of the AS 4100-98 code. The material that is used is based on the material that
most closely matches the yield strength specified and the section shape.
The following materials are used based on the yield strength assigned to the member.
Specified Fy (MPa)

Shape

Material Used

250-280

Non-Hollow Sections

AS/NZS 3679.1 250

280-330

Non-Hollow Sections

AS/NZS 3679.1 300

330-380

Non-Hollow Sections

AS/NZS 3679.1 350

380-400

Non-Hollow Sections

AS/NZS 3679.1 400

200-350

Pipe, Tube

AS/NZS 1163 450

350-450

Pipe, Tube

AS/NZS 1163 350

450-500

Pipe, Tube

AS/NZS 1163 250

For steel with a nominal Fy outside of the ranges specified no steel material will be found and the
section will be assigned a small yield strength and fail in design. A large interaction value on a design is
indicative of assigned yield strength outside the ranges indicated above.
Each of these materials provides a different yield strength depending on the thickness of the elements
(flange, web etc). of a cross section being designed. The yield strength used in the final design is printed
in the detailed report output.

Load Combinations
Load Combinations for AS 4100 are defined in AS/NZS 1170. When Notional loads are created they will
be included in all combinations that contain only gravity load cases when selecting the AS/NZS 1170
load combination code to generate the load combinations.

AS/NZS 1170
Load combination template files were generated based on AS/NZS 1170.0:2002, Section 4.2
Combinations of Actions for Ultimate Limit States. Section 4.2.2 Strength
The combinations included in the load combination template are:
a. [1.35G]
b. [1.2G, 1.5Q]
c. [1.2G, 1.51Q]

RAM Structural System

79

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
d.
e.
f.
g.

[1.2G, Wu, cQ]

[0.9G, Wu]
[G, Eu, cQ]
[1.2G, Su, cQ]

where
G
Q
Wu
Eu
Su
c

=
=
=
=
=
=

the Dead Load (permanent action)

the Live Load (imposed action)
the Wind Load
the Earthquake Load
the Snow Load (per Section 4.2.3(a))
the combination factor for imposed action and user can provide in the
generator dialog box
the factor for determining quasi-permanent values (long term) of
actions

c and l are given in Table 4.1.

The program does not explicitly distinguish long-term imposed loads from other imposed loads, so the
combinations of Combination (c) will not be generated, as they would always result in combinations
with smaller factors than the corresponding combinations of Combination (b). Notably, the values listed
in Table 4.1 for Storage loads are different from those listed for, say, Office and Residential loads.
However, since all of the different types of Live Loads are analyzed and combined prior to the
application of load combinations, the program will not be able to apply a different c value to different
Live Loads; the user will specify the value of c and the program will apply that to all of the Live Load in
the appropriate combinations.
The combinations are expanded as follows:
(a) 1.35DL + 1.35ND
(b) 1.2DL + 1.2 ND + 1.5LL + 1.5NL
(b) 1.2DL + 1.2 ND + 1.5LLRoof + 1.5NR
(b)1.2DL + 1.2 ND + 1.5sLL + 1.5NL + 1.5LLRoof+ 1.5NR
(d) 1.2DL + Psic * LL W
(d) 1.2DL W
(e) 0.9DL W
(f) DL + Psic * LL E
(f) DL E
(g) DL E
Psic is c specified by the user. The program pattern loads (skip loads) the Live Load; PosLL is the
member forces resulting from the loading patterns that create the normal downward acting load
conditions, while NegLL is the member forces resulting from the loading patterns that create uplift.
Likewise for PosSnow and NegSnow.
The generated load combinations can be viewed using the Reports Load Combinations command.

Effective Length Ke-Factor

The K-factors for beams and braces can be specified by the user using the Criteria Effective Length
command, or on a member-by-member basis using the Assign menu. The Ke-factors for columns can be
either specified by the user or calculated by the program. For braced frames the calculated value is
always 1.0. For unbraced frames the calculated value is based on an approximation to the graphs

RAM Structural System

80

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Member Code Check
provided in AS 4100 -98 section 4.6.3.3. The approximation is currently based on the AISC nomograph
equations. If the user is not satisfied with the values calculated by these equations they should assign
the effective length value directly to the members.
For determining at column bases the following rules are followed. is limited to 10.0 for columns
when there are no beams framing in, or when only pinned end beams are framing in; this limits ke to a
value of 3.0, rather than the theoretical value of infinity. is limited to 0.6 at the bottom of the column if
it is fixed to the footing. Columns that are pinned top and bottom are given ke-factors of 1.0. Knee brace
columns are assigned a ke factor of 1.0 in the direction of the knee brace. If a spring exists at the base of
a column the spring rotational stiffness is considered as the that end of the column.

Design Assumptions
The following assumptions and criteria have been made in the implementation of the AS 4100 design
code in RAM Frame (all references are to Sections in AS 4100-98):
The analysis is Elastic per 4.4 with second order affects based on both amplified moments per
4.4.2/3 and directly per Appendix E.
No net area checks are performed (i.e. no consideration is given for bolt holes due to connection
details).
The program conservatively assumes the unbraced segments are not rotationally restrained at the
ends of the segment as discussed in 5.4.3.4 and 5.6.3(3).
The structure is assumed to be a rectangular for the purposes of calculating secondary moment of
sway frames per clause 4.4.2.3.
The corrective factor for distribution of forces according to 7.3 is assumed as follows. Note however
as bolt areas are not provided these should not impact the design currently.

0.75 for braces

0.90 for Tee and Channels
1.00 for other members
No torsion is considered in the design
In the RAM Manager the engineer can designate if loads applied transverse to a member are applied
at the shear centre or top of section. This setting is considered only for beam design in RAM Frame.
For columns and braces where forces are only applied at the ends of a member they are assumed to
be through the shear center. Similarly for beams the longitudinal position of the load with respect to
Table 5.6.3(2) is considered to be within the segment, for braces and columns it is considered to be
at the segment ends.
Rolled sections other than tubes and pipes are assumed to be Hot Rolled (HR) per table 5.2. Rolled
tubes and pipes are assumed cold formed (CF) per Steel Designer Handbook. All welded sections
must be designated as either Heavy Welded (HW) or Light Welded (LW) as selected by the user in
the RAM Manager.
For beam design the twist restraint factor (Kt) is conservatively set to 1.1 per 5.6.3.

Connector Spacing for Double Angles

Maximum connector spacing for double angles is assumed to be limited to no more than 75% of the
largest effective length divided by radius of gyration of the single angles that comprise the double angle.
Based on this maximum spacing the
Max Connector Spacing = 0.75 x max ( L major/r maj, L minor/r minor ) * rz

RAM Structural System

81

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check
RAM Frame then calculates the minimum number of equal length segments that dont exceed this
maximum spacing length.

Error Messages
The following error messages may appear during the design process.
N* > Nomx or N* >
Nomy

Displayed when total axial load in the member exceeds the elastic critical
buckling resistance for the member in the plane of bending. This has
implications in the calculation of interaction values.

DelatSx Undef..,
DelatSy Undef.,
DeltaSAxial Undef.

Displayed when P-Delta is selected to be considered in the analysis and

total vertical load supported by story exceeds the story/diaphragm shear.
This has implications in the calculation of interaction values.

DeltaBx
DeltaBy
DeltaSx
DeltaSy

Displayed when the moment amplification factor exceeds the code specified
limit 1.4. The engineer can choose to consider P-Delta in Analysis if s
exceeds the code limits.

>
>
>
>

1.4,
1.4,
1.4,
1.4

T-O in Bend

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have bending
capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is
subject to a bending force following an analysis.

T-O in Comp

Some tension-only members (flat bars, rods etc) do not have compression
capacities calculated. This error is issued if one of these member types is
subject to a compression force following an analysis. This should only occur
if the user assigns a tension-only shape to a member that is then not
designated to be tension-only.

A-O in Bend

Some members capable of withstanding both tension and compression

forces only do not have bending capacities calculated. This error is issued if
one of these member types is subject to a bending force following an
analysis.

3.3 Joint Code Check

RAM Structural System has implemented a design check of the restrained (fixed or rigid) frame joints.
This check involves evaluating the ability of a columns flanges and web to resist the shears and
concentrated forces imposed on the joint from the framing beams. Where the column is found
inadequate to resist the imposed loads, a web plate (doubler) and/or stiffeners will be designed. Prior to
performing a joint check the engineer should confirm the criteria by which the design is to be
performed. These criteria can be viewed and modified through the dialog displayed by invoking the
Criteria-Joints command. No joint code check is performed for hanging columns.

RAM Structural System

82

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

3.3.1 Assumptions and Limitations

RAM Structural System assumes that all beams framing into a joint have the same top of steel elevation.
For the case of beams with different depths (and sloped beams) this assumption differs from the
geometric assumption made in RAM Frame for analysis. As illustrated in below, in RAM Frame all
members (beams and columns) at a joint are assumed to have coincident longitudinal axes. It is the
engineers responsibility to determine the effect and validity of these assumptions with respect to their
particular application.
Design
Assumptions

Analysis
Assumptions

Joint checks can be performed on all valid steel beam-column joints. A valid joint is defined as one in
which the column is an I-section (Wide Flange) and where at least one steel member (designated as a
frame member) is rigidly connected to the flange of the column. If more than two rigidly connected steel
sections frame into one flange of a steel I-Section column, or if there are no rigidly connected steel
members attached to the flanges of the section, then no checks are performed. RAM Frame considers
two sides of the column and refers to them as Side A and Side B. Side A refers to the flange of the column
orientated along the local axis of the member as shown in the following figure. Side B is the column
flange located opposite Side A.
A

A
Rotated 0
A

B
Rotated 45
A

B
B
Rotated 90

Rotated 135

Figure 3: Line parallel to column web indicates local axis direction.

RAM Structural System

83

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

3.3.2 Joint Forces

For all valid joints (refer to the above section on limitations for the definition of a valid joint) the
program will calculate the capacity of the column web and flanges to resist the applied forces. For all
codes the panel zone shear checks are performed before any of the other required joint checks. RAM
Frame calculates the shear in the panel zone as the net sum of the shear from the column above, the
shear applied to the joint from the story (through the diaphragm), the axial load in the beams (divided
between the beam flanges) and the shear due to beam moments. As illustrated in the following figure,
the story shear applied to the joint is assumed to be the net difference of the shear in the column above
the joint, the axial load in the beams framing into the joint, and the column shear directly below the
joint. Note that the angle of the column above the joint, and the beams framing into the joint, is
considered when calculating Vcol above, PA and PB.
With the Criteria Column Moments command in Steel Standard Provisions mode in RAM Frame,
the user can specify the portion of the calculated Gravity moments to be included in the design of the
columns. This feature is described in the Column Moments Section of this manual. The Joint Checks also
account for these specified reductions; the Gravity beam moments at the joint are reduced as specified.

VCol above + Vstory

PB

PA
Vbelow

Vstory =Vbelow -VCol above +PA +PB

Figure 4:
When calculating the design panel zone shear the program assumes that this story shear is applied
above the joint. In the case where a valid joint is not connected to the diaphragm there should be no
story shear applied to the joint. An exception to this is the case where a brace frames into the joint from
above. The engineer should use the joint checks with caution whenever a brace member frames into the
joint.
The panel zone forces are calculated as shown in the following figure.

RAM Structural System

84

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

VCol above + Vstory

VPTB VMTB
PB

VMTA VPTA

P
Panel
MB Zone MA A

VPBB VMBB

VMBA VPBA

Vcol below

Figure 5: Dashed arrows represent the moments and axial loads applied to the joint by the beams. To
determine the panel zone shear these moments and axial loads are resolved into concentrated flange forces
as shown by the solid arrows.
In this figure, the applied beam moments (MA and MB) are resolved into a couple by dividing by the
beam depth (VMTA = VMBA = MA/Beam depth [between mid heights of flanges]). The story shear is
assumed applied above the panel zone. The axial load in the beams is applied to the joint through the
beam flanges based on their areas. VPTA is therefore calculated as PA x Area of Top flange of Beam A /
Total flange area for beam on side A. The panel zone shear for the forces shown in the previous figure
(all forces shown are positive in magnitude) is calculated as:
Panel zone shear = Vcol above + Vstory VPTB VPTA VMTB VMTA
The beam flange-to-column-flange force used for the other joint checks is taken as:
Concentrated top flange force side B of joint = VPTB + VMTB
The other beam flange-to-column-flange forces are calculated in the same manner.
With a sloped beam the calculation of design forces for consideration in the joint design (design of
stiffeners and web plates) are modified as illustrated in the following figure. The figure illustrates the
forces a beam exerts on a column at the joint. In this example the beam is considered to be in
compression.

RAM Structural System

85

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check
M

M
P

M.cos()/d

M.cos()/d +
P.cos()/2 V.sin()/2

M.cos()/d

M.cos()/d +
P.cos()/2 V.sin()/2

M.cos()/d +
P.cos()/2

M.cos()/d +
P.cos()/2

Figure 6: A) Ignore axial and shear, B) Include Axial and Shear, C) Include axial and shear if inc. force
When the beam frames into a sloping column which makes an angle with the vertical, is substituted
with ( + ) in the equations above. The beam flange forces on the column are resolved horizontally for
the design of the column stiffeners and web plates. However, local flange column flange checks are
performed using beam flange forces acting orthogonally to the column flange.
M

M
P

M.cos(+)/d

M.cos(+)/d +
P.cos(+)/2 V.sin(+)/2

M.cos(+)/d

M.cos(+)/d +
P.cos(+)/2 V.sin(+)/2

M.cos(+)/d +
P.cos(+)/2
M.cos(+)/d +
P.cos(+)/2

Figure 7: A) Ignore axial and shear, B) Include Axial and Shear, C) Include axial and shear if inc. force

3.3.3 Joint Design

In the event that the ability of the column web to resist the applied shear is exceeded, then an
appropriate web plate (doubler) will be designed. RAM Frame will only provide a web plate where the
panel zone shear capacity of the column is exceeded by more than 1%. If a web plate is required, then
where the capacity of a columns flanges and web (including the contribution of the web plate) is
exceeded for any of the concentrated force checks, RAM will attempt to increase the thickness of the
web plate to increase the columns capacity. If an adequate web plate cannot be designed, then a
stiffener will be used and the web plate will once again only be sized for the panel zone shear. Where no
web plate is required for panel zone shear check, but the capacity of the column flanges and web is

RAM Structural System

86

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check
exceeded for any of the concentrated force checks, RAM will provide a stiffener to meet the code
requirements. The design of the web plate and stiffeners at a joint is based on the criteria provided by
the engineer through the dialog displayed by invoking the Criteria-Joints command.

AISC ASD 9th

The requirements of Supplement No. 1 (December 17, 2001) are included as an option in the ASD joint
design. Select ASD Supplement No.1 to implement the following revision:
Pbf = the computed force delivered to the flange or moment connection plate multiplied by 5/3
This removes the distinction between lateral load cases and gravity load cases on the value of Pbf.

Panel Zone Check

For calculation of strength purposes the depth of the web plate (when one is required) is assumed to be
the clear distance between column flanges. This is true for both rolled and built-up sections. For a rolled
section the full depth of the section is considered when calculating the web panel zone capacity, for built
up sections only the clear distance between the column flanges is used to calculate the web capacity.
When panel zone check is performed for sloping columns, the depth of the web plate (when one is
required) is assumed to be the horizontal clear distance between column flanges.

Local Web Yielding

According to AISC the column capacity to prevent local web yielding is diminished at the ends of a
member. In RAM Frame this provision applies to the top of the column, when no column exists above.
To calculate the column capacity at these locations RAM Frame uses the maximum of the framing beams
flange thickness or the columns k dimension (distance from outside face of column flange to the web toe
of the web-to-flange fillet) in equations K1-2, K1-3. If a web plate is present then the plate thickness and
yield strength are used in these equations, along with the column properties (flange thickness etc).

Web Crippling
The same restrictions are applied in calculating the Web Crippling Capacity according to chapter K1.4 as
are taken when calculating the Local Web Yielding capacity. That is, when calculating the column
capacity at these locations RAM Frame uses the maximum of the framing beams flange thickness or the
columns k dimension (distance from outside face of column flange to the web toe of the web-to-flange
fillet) in equations K1-4, K1-5. If a web plate is present then the plates thickness and yield strength are
used in these equations along with the column properties (flange thickness etc).

Stiffener Design
Stiffeners are designed in accordance with Specification K1.8. The force used to design stiffeners is
considered to be the difference between the applied load and the capacity of the column to resist this
load. For some of the above joint checks the forces are converted from working stress to capacity values.
Where these forces resulted in the use of stiffeners they are converted back to working stress forces for
stiffener design. Refer to AISC K1.2 for conversion from working stress to capacity values.

AISC 360, LRFD 3rd

RAM Structural System

87

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

Panel Zone Check

For calculation of strength purposes the depth of the web plate (when one is required) is assumed to be
the clear distance between column flanges. This is true for both rolled and built-up sections. For a rolled
section the full depth of the section is considered when calculating the web panel zone capacity, for built
up sections only the clear distance between the column flanges is used to calculate the web capacity.
Two different equation sets are presented in AISC when performing panel zone checks. The first set
(equations LRFD 3rd: K1-9, K1-10 / AISC 360: J10-9, J10-10) is applicable when panel-zone deformation
is not considered in the analysis. The second set (LRFD 3rd: K1-11, K1-12 / AISC 360: J10-11, J10-12) is
applicable where panel-zone deformation is considered in the analysis. RAM Frame looks at the rigid
end factor to determine into which group the structure falls. If full rigid ends are used then RAM Frame
assumes that the Panel Zone is not considered in the analysis. If any value less than the full rigid end
zone is used, then the program assumes that the panel zone is considered in the analysis and equations
LRFD 3rd: K1-11, K1-12 or AISC 360: J10-11, J10-12 are used.
When panel zone check is performed for sloping columns, the depth of the web plate (when one is
required) is assumed to be the horizontal clear distance between column flanges.

Local Web Yielding

According to AISC the column capacity to prevent local web yielding is diminished at the ends of a
member. In RAM Frame this provision applies to the top of the column, when no column exists above.
To calculate the column capacity at these locations RAM Frame uses the maximum of the framing beams
flange thickness or the columns k dimension (distance from outside face of column flange to the web toe
of the web-to-flange fillet) in equations LRFD 3rd: K1-2, K1-3 and AISC 360: J10-2, J10-3. If a web plate
is present then the plates thickness and yield strength are used in the equations along with the column
properties (flange thickness etc).

Web Crippling
The same restrictions are applied in calculating the Web Crippling Capacity according to section LRFD
3rd: K1.4 and AISC 360: J10.4 as are taken when calculating the Local Web Yielding capacity. That is,
when calculating the column capacity at these locations RAM Frame uses the maximum of the framing
beams flange thickness or the column k dimension (distance from outside face of column flange to the
web toe of the web-to-flange fillet) in equations LRFD 3rd: K1-4, K1-5a and K1-5b, AISC 360: J10-4,
J10-5a, J10-5b. If a web plate is present then the plate thickness and yield strength are used in these
equations, using the column properties when necessary (flange thickness etc).

Stiffener Design
Stiffeners are designed in accordance with Specification LRFD 3rd: K1.9, AISC 360: J10.8. The forces used
to design stiffeners are calculated to be the difference between the applied load and the capacity of the
column to resist this load. The minimum required area of the stiffeners is calculated per the AISC design
guide 13, equation 4.3-1.

BS5950 Part 1 : 1990

RAM Structural System

88

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

Web Buckling (4.5.2.1)

RAM Structural System assumes that when calculating the slenderness of an unstiffened web of depth d,
lambda is taken as 2.5d/t. This assumption implies that the column flange on which the load is applied is
effectively restrained against rotation relative to the web, and lateral movement relative to the other
flange. Where stiffeners are used to resist this load they will be designed according to 4.5.2.3. The
stiffeners are also checked as bearing stiffeners per 4.5.3.2.

Web Bearing Tension and Compression (4.5.3.1)

If stiffeners are required they are designed in accordance with 4.5.3.2. If the column does not have the
capacity to carry the applied load, then the web bearing capacity is recalculated using the lower of the
nominal yield strength of the column web and the stiffener.

Web Tensile Force (4.5.4, 6.7.6)

Where required, stiffeners are designed in accordance with 4.5.4. Per 6.7.6, the dimension rc (and zc) is
assumed to equal the column k (dimension from outer column flange face to the root of the web-toflange weld) less the thickness of the column flange (k-tf). For built up sections the engineer should
provide the appropriate k value in the master steel table to obtain the correct zc value.

Web Shear (4.5.6)

RAM Structural System will not design diagonal web stiffeners. However, the required force for diagonal
stiffener design is provided in the output. The capacity of the column web is calculated using the design
yield strength of the column. If this capacity is not sufficient, then the column web capacity is
recalculated using the lower of the column web and stiffener plate yield strengths. The reported
stiffener design force is the horizontal shear calculated as the difference between the applied force and
the capacity of the web (calculated using the lower of the web and stiffener nominal yield strengths).

Stiffener Design
Where stiffeners are required for web buckling (4.5.2.1) then they are designed in accordance with
4.5.2.3. Note that a 20 N/mm2 reduction is not taken on the design yield strength of the stiffeners. The
stiffeners are designed using the lower of the web and stiffener yield strengths. Where stiffeners are
checked for bearing per 4.5.3.2 the cope dimension is considered. The stiffeners are always designed in
accordance with 4.5.2.3, 4.5.3.2 and 4.5.4 when applicable. Note that the stiffeners are not considered to
be intermediate stiffeners per 4.5.5., i.e. they are not considered necessary to resist shear buckling. The
engineer has significant control over the stiffener design dimensions. The criteria by which the stiffener
dimensions are calculated can be modified in the dialog displayed by invoking the criteria-joints
command. The width of the stiffener is calculated first. If the thickness is calculated per code then per
specification 4.5.1.2 the outstand of the stiffener from the face of the column web will not exceed 13 ts
Epsilon. The length of the stiffener (when not required to be full length) is calculated according to
4.5.10. The minimum length of stiffener that will be provided by RAM Frame is one-third of the depth of
the column.

BS5950 Part 1 : 2000

The provisions of BS 5950-1:2000 for web bearing (4.5.2.1), web buckling (4.5.3.1) and local flange
bending (6.7.5) have been implemented in RAM Frame. Note that for the beam flange that frames into

RAM Structural System

89

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check
the absolute top of a column, the ae and be values in 4.5.2.1 and 4.5.3.1 are conservatively taken as 0.0.
Refer to the previous section on BS5950 Part 1:1990 for more information.

CAN/CSA S16-01, S16-09

Compression 21.3 (a)
The capacity of the column flange to resist an applied compression force is calculated per specification
21.3a. When calculating the class of the web per Table 1, the axial load (Cf) is calculated for the load
combination that resulted in the maximum compression force on flange, as shown in the output. The
capacity of a web plate (doubler), when provided is added to that of the column. Where the column (and
web plate) capacity is exceeded, a stiffener is provided. Note that for the top flange of a beam at the top
of a column, the coefficient of k, in section 21.3a is reduced from 5.0 to 2.5.

Tension 21.3 (b)

The capacity of the column flange to resist an applied tension force is calculated per specification 21.3b.
This capacity is based only on the column flange, and the addition of a web plate is ignored.

Panel Zone Web Shear

The capacity of the column to resist panel zone shear is calculated in accordance with 13.4.1.2. For a
rolled section the full depth of the section is considered when calculating the web panel zone capacity,
for built up sections only the clear distance between the column flanges is used to calculate the web
capacity. Where a web plate is required its capacity is also calculated based on 13.4.1.2 with d taken as
the clear depth between flanges.

Eurocode 3: BS EN 1993-1-8:2005
Panel Zone Web Shear
The capacity of the column to resist the applied panel zone shear is calculated according to 6.2.6.1 RAM
Frame assumes that bs is the distance between flanges of welded I-Sections, and the distance between
the toe of the flange-to-web welds in rolled I-Sections. Where a supplementary web plate is required the
program will automatically use a web plate equal in thickness to that of the column web (per 6.2.6.1 (6)
(12)), but rounded up to the closest web plate increment (see Criteria section). When the capacity is
calculated only the thickness of the plate equal to that of the web is considered (per 6.2.6.1). This
implementation may result in a confusing output in the following situation. If a column has an 11 mm
thick web, and based on forces a 12.5 mm thick plate is required, then obviously a suitable web plate
cannot be designed and the program will indicate that no web plate can be designed. However, when
looking at the output the provided web plate may be 15 mm thick. This occurs as the maximum
thickness of the provided web plate is 11 mm (same as column web), but this is rounded up to the next
increment which if the user set to 5mm, results in a plate 15mm thick. While a 15mm thick web plate is
provided, when we calculate the strength of the web plate the program only considers 11 mm of the
plate effective and states that it fails. This situation will only occur when the required thickness of the
plate is between the column web thickness, and the web thickness rounded up to the next thickness
increment. No web buckling requirements are checked. The engineer is also responsible for specifying a
web plate yield strength that is similar to that of the column (as required by specification 6.2.6.1 (8)).

RAM Structural System

90

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

Resistance of Tension Zone (Flange Bending) 6.2.6.4.3

The ability of the column flange to resist a concentrated tension force applied to its flange is calculated
according to 6.2.6.4.3. For both welded and built up sections the rc value is calculated as the difference
between the columns k dimension and the thickness of the column flange. For built-up sections the
engineer should therefore specify the appropriate k factor in the master table to account for the web-toflange fillet weld dimension. Where the user specifies that the member capacity is to be used to calculate
forces (see Criteria-Joints), the program will instead calculate the force as: Beff,b,fc Tfb Fyb / Gamma
Mo (Eqn 6.20). Beff,b,fc is calculated according 4.10. The user should specify an over-strength factor
(see Criteria-Joints) of 1.0 if no strain hardening is to be considered.

Resistance of Tension Zone (Web Bearing) 6.2.6.3

The ability of the column web to resist a concentrated tension force applied to its flange is calculated
according to 6.2.6.3. For both welded and built up sections the ab value is ignored as a complete joint
penetration weld is assumed. If a web plate is used then the web plates capacity is calculated
independently of the column web. If the thickness of web plate required exceeds 0.5 times the column
web thickness (6.17) then no thickness of web plate is adequate, and the required thickness is reported
as -25.4mm (-1.0in). Refer to flange bending section above for information on the web-to-flange weld
dimension (ac) in a built up section. Note that at the top of a column (where no column exists above, the
coefficient for (tfc + rc) is assumed to be 2.5 instead of 5.0.

Resistance of Compression Zone (Web Bearing) 6.2.6.2 (1)

The ability of the column web to resist a concentrated compression force applied to its flange is
calculated according to 6.2.6.2. For both welded and built up sections the ab value is ignored as a
complete joint penetration weld is assumed. If a web plate is used then the web plates capacity is
calculated independently of the column web. If the thickness of web plate required exceeds 0.5 times the
column web thickness (6.17) then no thickness of web plate is adequate, and the required thickness is
reported as negative 25.4mm (-1.0in). Refer to flange bending section above for information on the
web-to-flange weld dimension (ac) in a built up section. Note that at the top of a column (where no
column exists above, the coefficient for (tfc + rc) is assumed to be 2.5 instead of 5.0. The program
assumes that transverse movement of the column flanges (see Eurocode figure 6.7) is prevented. Where
the capacity of the framing beams is used to perform the design, no axial load is assumed on the joint
column.

Stiffener Design
Where stiffeners are required only for web bearing or flange bending checks, half column depth
stiffeners will be designed. The engineer should confirm that half the column depth is adequate. The
stiffener dimensions are based on the user criteria settings (see Criteria-Joints), the area required to
resist the applied flange force (less the capacity of the column), and the code requirements (thickness at
least equal to the adjoining beam flange thickness). The program also dimensions the stiffener thickness
to ensure a fully effective section i.e. class 1 or 2, but the stiffener thickness is arbitrarily limited to three
times the framing beam flange thickness. The lower of the stiffener and column web yield strengths is
used for the column strength when performing this check. The program assumes one stiffener is
provided each side of the column web.

RAM Structural System

91

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

AS 4100-98
Web Buckling Compression (5.13.4)
RAM Frame checks each column flange when subject to compression force according to the
requirements of 5.13.4. In this section bb (total bearing width) is based on a 45 degree dispersion from
the applied load point. Where a flange is deemed to be near the top of a column this dispersion is
assumed to be in one direction only and bb = bs + 2.5x tf + bbw, where bbw = d2/2. The capacity of the web
acting as a column is calculated according to Section 6.3.3 using a column width of bb and thickness
equal to that of the column web and following per 5.13.4: le/r = 2.5 x clear depth of column / thickness
web column, b = 0.5, and kf = 1.0. A web plate if it exists will be ignored when performing this check.
Where required stiffeners will be used to resist this load, they will be designed according to discussion
on stiffener design below.

Web Bearing Yielding Tension and Compression (5.13.3)

A web plate, if provided, is not considered when performing this check. The dimension bbf will only use
2.5tf if the beam flange being considered is at the top of the column. The web plate if it exists is not
considered in the calculation of the bearing capacity. If stiffeners are required they are designed in
accordance with the discussion on stiffener design below.

Local Flange Bending - Tension

A local flange bending check has been performed according to the design provisions as documented in
the Steel Designers Handbook. The flange capacity at the column is calculated as follows:
Rt = fyc(tfbbrc + 7tfc2)
where
fyc
tfb
brc
tfc

=
=
=
=

Yield strength of the column

thickness flange of beam
column web thickness plus two column fillet radius
thickness of the flange of the column

Where required, stiffeners are designed in accordance with the discussion below.

Web Shear (5.11.2/4/5)

RAM Frame will perform a check on the panel zone strength of a column at a beam column joint. The
column web capacity will be based on the provisions of 5.11.2, 5.11.4 and 5.11.5. The capacity of the
column web is calculated using the design yield strength of the column. If this capacity is not sufficient
then a web plate that will be added according to the engineer specified criteria, and the panel zone
capacity including the web plate will be calculated. The capacity of the web plate will only include the
plate thickness over the clear depth of the column.

RAM Structural System

92

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

Stiffener Design
Where stiffeners are required for web buckling, bearing or flange bending they will be designed as full
length stiffeners (complete depth of column web). The engineer has significant control over the stiffener
design dimensions. The criteria by which the stiffener dimensions are calculated can be modified in the
dialog displayed by invoking the Criteria - Joints command. The minimum thickness of the stiffener will
be the same as the beam flange thickness. Where a stiffener is designed it will be considered as a simple
column comprised of the two stiffeners and a width of column web to create a cross (+) shaped column
section. The effective length of the stiffener will be considered as 0.75 x length of the stiffener, kf = 1, b
= 0.5. If stiffeners are not able to be designed the stiffener optimization criteria may need to be adjusted
or a larger column size used.

RAM Structural System

93

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Technical Notes

Joint Code Check

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

94

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

A number of reports are available in Steel-Standard Provision Mode. Many of these have already been
described in the RAM Frame Analysis Chapter. The reports presented below are those that are not
described in the Analysis chapter and are specific to the Steel Standard Provision Mode.
Many of the reports are based on load combinations (member forces, reactions etc). In Steel Standard
Provision Mode these reports are all based on the standard provision load combinations (generated and
custom) from this mode only.
Below is a summary of the reports available in the Steel-Standard Provision Mode. The on-line help also
provides information on each of the reports.
Printer/Screen/ The first four items in the Reports menu allow the engineer to specify where the
Text File/Viewer output is to be sent. The engineer can choose to send output directly to the printer,
File
to the screen, to a comma separated text file or to a viewer file format. This last
option allows the engineer to later view the file, with all its formatting, using the
file viewer application provided with the program. This file can also be delivered,
along with the viewer, to anyone wishing to view the report.
Model Data

The Model Data report is a listing all lateral members, their fixity, boundary
conditions and section properties. This is data that can be modified using the
Assign menu items.

Code Check
Criteria

The Code Check Criteria is a listing of all criteria specified in the Criteria
command in the Post-Processor Mode in addition to the criteria used for Roof Live
Loads.

Load
Combinations

The Load Combinations report is a listing of the analyzed load cases of which the
combinations are comprised, the program-generated load combinations, and the
user-defined load combinations from this mode only.

AISC 360 Direct

Analysis
Validation

The AISC 360 Direct Analysis Validation report checks the validity of the analysis
based on the requirements of the Direct Analysis Method outlined in AISC 360.
Warnings are given if the proper analysis and design criteria options have not
been selected or if they are inconsistent with the notional loads or combinations
used. This report is only available when the selected Code is AISC 360. The
Process Member Code Check command must be performed before the report is
available.

Member Code
Check

The Member Code Check report lists detailed results of the currently selected Steel
Design Code Specifications check for individual members. The report includes
member information, design parameters, the calculated member forces for the
controlling load cases, and the interaction equation results.
Member Code Check reports can be printed for a single frame member, all frame
members included in a fenced area, all members of a selected frame, all frame
members shown in the current view or for every frame member in the model.

RAM Structural System

95

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Joint Code Check The Joint Code Check report lists detailed results of the currently selected Steel
Design Code Specifications check for individual moment-frame (rigid) steel joints.
The report includes joint information, design parameters, joint forces and the
required stiffeners and/or web plates.
Joint Code Check reports can be printed for a single frame member, all joint
members included in a fenced area, all joints of a selected frame, all frame joints
shown in the current view or for every frame joint in the model.
Member Check
Summary

The Member Code Check Summary report lists abbreviated results of the selected
Steel Design Code Specification checks for every steel frame member. It includes a
listing of all criteria set in Analysis Mode and Steel-Standard Provision Mode, all
analyzed load cases and all load combinations. For each member the calculated
member forces for the controlling load combination and the interaction equation
results are shown.

Joint Check
Summary

The Joint Code Check Summary report lists abbreviated results of the selected
Steel Design Code Specification checks for every moment frame (fixed beamcolumn flange) joint. It includes a listing of some of the criteria set in the CriteriaJoints dialog. For each joint the calculated member forces for the controlling load
combination and the required web plate and stiffeners are shown.

Member Forces

The Member Forces report lists the member forces for an individual frame
member for the generated and user-specified load combinations. This includes
axial load, major and minor moment, major and minor shear, and torsion. It
includes member information and criteria settings. The member forces are those
that occur at the member or segment ends.
Member Force reports can be printed for a single frame member, all frame
members included in a fenced area, all members of a selected frame, all frame
members shown in the current view or for every frame member in the model.
This output does not include any Code Check results, but has been included in the
Post-Processor Mode as a convenient tool for listing member forces for the
generated combinations.

Member Force
Summary

The Frame Member Force Summary report lists the member forces for every
frame member for the generated and user-specified load combinations. This
includes axial load, major and minor moment, major and minor shear, and torsion.
The analysis criteria are also included in the report. The member forces are those
that occur at the member or segment ends.
This output does not include any Code Check results, but has been included in the
Post-Processor Mode as a convenient tool for listing member forces for the
generated combinations.

Member Force
Envelope

RAM Structural System

The Member Force Envelope report lists the maximum and minimum member
forces for an individual member for the generated and user-specified load
combinations. The member forces are those that occur at the member ends as well
as at any point along the member. The controlling load combination and location
are indicated. The load cases are listed but the combinations are not; rather, the
number of generated and user-defined combinations that were investigated is
shown.

96

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Code Check Criteria

This output does not include any Code Check results, but has been included in the
Post-Processor Mode as a convenient tool for listing member forces envelope for
the generated combinations.
Reactions

The Reactions report lists the reactions for each foundation node for each of the
generated and user-specified combinations.
This output does not include any Code Check results, but has been included in the
Post-Processor Mode as a convenient tool for listing reactions for the generated
combinations.

Reactions
Envelope

The Reactions Envelope report lists the maximum and minimum reactions at each
foundation node for the generated and user-specified combinations. The analysis
criteria are also listed. Reactions Envelope reports are printed frame by frame.

Screen Print

A printout of the screen using the Reports - Print Screen command or the Print
button after Code Check has been invoked will show the color coded members and
will include a color key. If the printer is capable of printing in color, this output will
be in color.

Print Preview

Use the Reports - Print Preview command to preview the printout for the current
view.

Print Setup

Use the Reports - Print Setup command to configure the selected printer.

4.1 Code Check Criteria

The Frame Code Check Criteria report lists the criteria used in the Steel Standard Post-Processors. The
sidesway condition, braced or unbraced, is indicated. The Effective Length (K-Factor) values for
columns, beams and braces are listed. For columns, Nomograph (ASD/LRFD), Appendix E (BS5950)
may be printed. This indicates that the effective length factor for ASD and LRFD will be calculated based
on the nomograph published in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Appendix E in the BS5950.
The criteria used to determine the compression flange bracing conditions for columns and beams is
listed
The Roof Live Load is indicated as being either Reducible or Snow. If Snow, the criteria and/or the load
factor for including Snow loads in combinations with Seismic loads is indicated.
The criteria for Sidesway, Effective length and Compression flange bracing are specified from the
Criteria menu command, or are assigned to individual members from the Assign menu command. The
designation of Roof Live Load type is specified in Criteria - Live Load Reduction in RAM Manager. The
criterion for Snow Factor is set in the Combinations-Generate menu command.

4.2 Load Combinations

The Load Combinations report lists the combinations used in the standard provision steel code checks.
The report includes the Roof Live Load criteria, which affects the generated load combinations.

RAM Structural System

97

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

AISC 360 Direct Analysis Validation
The load cases included in the load combinations are listed along with the generated and user-specified
load combinations, as well as which of the combinations are selected to be used in the code check. For
generated combinations the Code specified as the basis of the generation is indicated. For example,
AISC ASD + UBC indicates that the generated combinations are for ASD design, based on the
combinations specified by the Uniform Building Code.

4.3 AISC 360 Direct Analysis Validation

For AISC 360 LRFD or ASD design specifications, it is the engineers responsibility to ensure that the
selection of options for P-delta, B1, B2, fraction of gravity loads for Notional Loads, Stiffness Reduction
and b used in the stiffness reduction are all consistent and correct as required by the Direct Analysis
Method.
To aid the engineer, this report is provided when AISC 360-10 or AISC 360-05 has been selected as the
design code. The report examines the selection of options for P-delta, B1, B2, Notional Loads, Stiffness
Reduction and b , along with analysis results, and reports on the validity of each criteria selection. If
the analysis is deemed invalid, it is reported. It is then the responsibility of the engineer to make the
necessary corrections to those criteria selections, or in some cases to modify the structure so that
limitations are satisfied. If criteria options are not selected that are required, a warning is printed in red
(which must be rectified in order for the analysis to be valid); if criteria options are selected that are not
required, a warning is printed in blue (which need not be rectified as they are conservative).
The Process Member Code Check command must be performed before the report is available.
The report is composed of four sections. In the following paragraphs, these sections are explained.

4.3.1 Design Code

The chosen design code is printed in this section. It is either AISC 360-10 (ASD or LRFD) or AISC 360-05
(ASD or LRFD).

4.3.2 Second-Order Analysis

The criteria selections by the engineer regarding 2nd order analysis are reported in this section. This
includes the options to perform a P-Delta analysis based on the Geometric Stiffness method and to apply
the B1 and B2 factors.
B1
Factors

RAM Structural System

The worst B1 ratio for any member for any combination is calculated and reported, and the
necessity of including P-d in the analysis or not is indicated according to C2.1(2)(b) of AISC
360-10 or Eq. (A-7-1) of AISC 360-05 (i.e., Pr < 0.15PeL). The member number and load
combination corresponding to the worst ratio is printed. Note that the program searches
all load combinations for members major and minor axis (except members with pinned
ends), and then it reports the worst ratio among all members. The report also shows the
number of elements where Pr exceeds 0.15PeL.

98

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

AISC 360 Direct Analysis Validation
B2
Factors

In this section, information regarding B2 and its parameters (i.e., RMx and RMy) is printed. If
B2 factors are applied, the maximum values of B2x and B2y on any diaphragm on any level
for any combination is determined and reported. This can be used to determine if the
notional loads need be applied to all combinations or to only the gravity combinations. If
both B2 and the current P-delta option are chosen, the engineer is notified that both
options are not needed in order to include 2nd order effects.

4.3.3 Notional Loads

If no notional load cases are included in any load combination, an error message is printed.
The fractions of Gravity loads used in the generation of notional loads are printed for both X and Ydirections. If more than one set of notional load cases are found, the report only includes the set with
smallest fraction of gravity loads.
The report also indicates whether the notional loads are included only in gravity combinations or in all
combinations.
Under certain conditions, notional loads may not be needed in all load combinations according to the
Specification (notional loads should be included in all combinations if B2>1.5 for models with nominal
member properties, or B2>1.7 for models with reduced member properties). The program checks this
and reports whether notional loads should be included for all load combinations or for only the gravity
load combination.

4.3.4 Reduced Stiffness

The Specification mandates reduction of both flexural and axial stiffness of steel members. This should
be carried out for all lateral members that provide lateral stiffness to structure.
The report first checks if all members are pinned or not. If this is the case, it is not necessary to reduce
the flexural stiffnesses and this is indicated in the report.
If the option to reduce the stiffnesses was not selected in RAM Frame Analysis mode, an error message
is given.
Flexural
Stiffness

The program calculates b based on Pr / Py for all load combinations for all members
contributing lateral stiffness (members with pinned ends or with no moments at their
ends are skipped). The smallest value of b is determined and reported, as well as the
number of members with b less than 1.0. The member with the smallest b is indicated
in the report.
Note that b value used in analysis is defined by the engineer in Criteria General in
RAM Frame Analysis mode. The value used in analysis is compared to smallest calculated
value of b , and validity of the value used is reported.

Axial
Stiffness

RAM Structural System

If the option to include the reduction to the axial stiffness is not selected, an error
message is given.

99

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Member Code Check

4.4 Member Code Check

4.4.1 AISC
The AISC Member Code Check report lists the results of the ASD and LRFD Code Check for an individual
member..
In the output, standard nomenclature is used. The x- and y subscripts indicate the strong and weak axis,
respectively. In many cases the term Minor and Major axis are used. Major axis refers to the strong axis
of the member, and minor to the weak axis.
For columns and braces the member forces at both the top and bottom are shown. For beams, only the
controlling member forces are shown, with the associated segment indicated.
The controlling load combination and the corresponding member forces and stresses (ASD) or
capacities (LRFD) are shown for both shear and flexure/axial force conditions. The member is
controlled by the greater of the Shear Check results and the Interaction Equation results.
The curvature of the member, either single or double, is listed for the Cm calculation when applicable.
In lieu of interaction equation results, slender members are indicated as such.

4.4.2 Eurocode
The Eurocode Member Code Check report lists the results of the Eurocode Code Check for an individual
member.
In the output, standard nomenclature is used. Major refers to the strong axis of the member and minor
to the weak axis.
For columns and braces the member forces at both the top and bottom are shown. For beams the
controlling segment and the associated end member forces are shown.
The controlling load combination and the corresponding member forces and capacities are shown. The
member is controlled by the greater of the interaction values from the Cross Section resistance, Buckling
resistance or Web Shear Buckling resistance.
Pertinent intermediate values used to calculate cross section and buckling capacities are printed.
In lieu of interaction equation results, members that are determined to be class 4 (slender) are indicated
as such.

RAM Structural System

100

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Member Code Check

4.4.3 CAN/CSA S16-01 / S16-09 Member Code Check

The CAN/CSA S16-01 or S16-09 Member Code Check report lists the results of the Code Check for an
individual member.
In the output, standard nomenclature is used. For columns and braces the member forces at both the
top and bottom are shown. For beams, only the controlling member forces are shown, with the
associated segment indicated.
The controlling load combination and the corresponding member forces and capacities are shown for
both shear and flexure/axial force conditions. The member is controlled by the greater of the Shear
Check results and the Interaction Equation results.
In the event that a capacity could not be calculated (See Error Messages on page 69) then the
appropriate reason will be printed on the output.

4.4.4 BS 5950 Member Code Check

The BS 5950 Member Code Check report lists the results of the Code Check for an individual member.
In the output, standard nomenclature is used. For columns and braces the member forces at both the
top and bottom are shown. For beams, only the controlling member forces are shown, with the
associated segment indicated.
The controlling load combination and the corresponding member forces and capacities are shown for
both shear and flexure/axial force conditions. The member is controlled by the greater of the Shear
Check results and the Interaction Equation results.
In the event that a capacity could not be calculated (See Error Messages) then the appropriate reason
will be printed on the output.

4.4.5 AS 4100-98 Member Code Check

The AS 4100-98 Member Code Check report lists the results of the Code Check for an individual
member.
In the output, standard nomenclature is used. For columns and braces the member forces at both the
top and bottom are shown. For beams, only the controlling member forces are shown, with the
associated segment indicated.
The controlling load combination and the corresponding member forces and capacities are shown for
both shear and flexure/axial force conditions. The member is controlled by the greater of the Shear
Check results and the Interaction Equation results.
In the event that a capacity could not be calculated (See Error Messages) then the appropriate reason
will be printed on the output.

RAM Structural System

101

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Member Check Summary

4.5 Member Check Summary

The Code Check Summary report lists the abbreviated results of the Steel Standard Provision Code
Checks for every steel member.

4.5.1 Criteria
The Analysis Criteria are listed as described in the Analysis chapter.

4.5.2 Code Check Criteria

The Code Check Criteria are listed as described in the Design Criteria section. The Load Cases used in the
Load Combinations are listed.

4.5.3 Load Combinations

A list of the Generated and Selected User-specified load combinations is listed.

4.5.4 Summary Results

The design forces of the controlling load combination are listed, with the controlling load combination
and Interaction Equation results.
LC

This is the controlling load combination number.

Interact The controlling Interaction Equation value is listed, with a reference to the Code equation
that produced the controlling value. In lieu of interaction equation results, slender members
(Class 4 in Eurocode) are indicated as such.

4.6 Joint Code Check

RAM Structural System

102

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Joint Code Check

4.6.1 Story Number

The number of the story on which the joint is located.

4.6.2 Joint Number

The node number of the joint.

4.6.3 Final Design

Web Plate Design
Thickness

The thickness of the web plate required to resist all the applied loads.

Web PL Thk Reqd The required thickness of the web plate to allow the web plate to be fillet welded
w/Fillet Weld
to the column flanges. This is a detailing requirement and is specified separately
from the thickness required to resist the applied loads.
Stiffener
Dimension

The Length (L), width (W) and thickness (T) of the stiffeners. Refer to the
assumptions and limitations section for the meaning of Side A and Side B. Top
refers to the stiffeners required at the elevation of the upper flange of the
framing beam/s. Bot refers to the stiffeners required at the elevation of the
bottom flange of the framing beam/s.

4.6.4 Joint Data and Material Properties

Yield Strengths The material strength of the stiffeners and web plate.
Joint Data

The size, angles and yield strengths of the column and framing beams at the joint.
Note that if the beams are not at the same angle (or exactly 180 degrees greater) of
the column, then they do not frame perpendicularly into the column flange.

4.6.5 Criteria
Some of the relevant data considered in the design of the joint. Refer to the code check criteria report for
all the joint check criteria. These criteria are changed in the dialog invoked through the criteria-joints
command.

RAM Structural System

103

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Joint Code Check

4.6.6 Results
Panel Zone

Refer to the design approach for information regarding the calculation of the
design panel zone shear. The moments and shears that controlled the panel zone
design are shown. Where a column exists above the joint, the shear in that column
for the controlling load combination is reported. Where a web plate is required the
thickness of web plate required to resist the applied load is provided. The capacity
of the column web with the actual thickness of the web plate as reported in the
final design section is reported. If the plastic capacities of the beams at a joint are
used to determine panel zone forces, then no load combinations are reported.

Equation K1-9
[AISC ASD 9th
Only], Required
Stiffener Area
[LRFD, CAN,
AS4100]

For ASD 9th, the force, associated load combination and the required area of
stiffeners is reported per AISC specification K1.9. For AISC 360 and LRFD 3rd the
required area is calculated per equation 4.3-1 of the AISC Design Guide 13. For
AS4100/CAN/CSA it represents the tension or compression force on a column
flange, less the column capacity at that point. The Ast shown in the report
represents the total area required at that location, i.e. it represents the sum of the
areas of two individual stiffeners.

Compression
(Tension
similar)

The flanges of a framing beam apply a compression force on the flange of the
column, depending on the loads applied on the member, and the load combination
under consideration. The type of joint check performed is listed in the left most
column. Note that some checks such as Web Buckling, are only reported where
concurrent-compression forces are calculated (refer to joint-criteria, geometry
section).

Flange

The beam flange under consideration. Top refers to the top flange of the beam
framing into the column flange.

Force

The maximum compressive force, from all the load combinations, for each flange.

LCo

The load combination number that resulted in the maximum compressive force
reported in the previous column. Where the beam capacities are used for forces
(refer to joint-criteria, design-forces section), then no load combination is reported
and the maximum flange force is assumed to apply for all checks.

Allow, Cap, Cap

w/t

The allowable (or capacity) of the column for the check currently being performed.
This may vary for each side of a column depending on the column and beam flange
dimensions. If a web plate is provided then the allowable load (or capacity)
includes the contribution of the web plate (hence the w/t designation). Note that
for ASD if both a web plate and stiffeners are provided, then the Allow always
includes the web plate contribution even though the column header only shows
Allow and not Allow w/t.

Stiffen

If stiffeners are provided and the column capacity is exceeded on either side of the
column then the need to provide a stiffener is indicated. Note that in some
circumstances there is a need to only stiffen on one flange of the column, but if
either side requires stiffening, then a Yes is displayed in this column.

tReqd

If a web plate (doubler) is provided without any stiffeners then this column is
displayed. This column represents the thickness of the web plate required for the
column to obtain adequate capacity to resist the applied load for this check. It

RAM Structural System

104

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Joint Code Check
represents the largest required thickness from side A and Side B (which may
differ).
All. W/t, Cap w/t If a web plate (doubler) is provided without any stiffeners then this column is
displayed. This column represents the joint capacity considering both the column
and web plate. It should exceed the applied force for both side A and B for this
check. It represents the smallest capacity calculated from side A and side B (which
may differ).

4.6.7 Stiffener Design [AISC 9th Only]

Where a stiffener is required to be designed as a column per ASD K1.8, or LRFD K1.9 then the results of
this design are reported. The stiffener column dimensions are calculated as prescribed in these
sections. Refer to the technical notes and the joint criteria section for more information on the stiffener
design.

4.6.8 Web Plate Details [AISC 9th Only]

This section displays several items that may be of use to the engineer, as well as may have controlled the
design of the web plate. The results displayed in this section are dependent on the criteria selected in
the criteria-joints dialog. The maximum stiffener force through the web plate refers to the maximum
load that must be transferred from a stiffener, through the web plate, into the column. This load can be
used to size the welds of the stiffener to the web plate (or column web). The required web plate
thickness for stiffener force is the thickness required of the web plate to resist the shear in the plate due
to the maximum stiffener force reported above. The required web plate thickness to prevent plate
buckling is the thickness required to avoid having to provide plug welds in the web plate. Refer to the
AISC Design Guide 13 for more information on all of these checks.

4.6.9 BS5950 Draft Amend, April 1998 / BS5950-1:2000

All output is the same as AISC ASD/LRFD unless noted otherwise.

Final Design
Diagonal
Stiffeners

RAM Structural System does not design the diagonal web stiffeners. However, the
program does indicate where these are required and also reports the magnitude of
the horizontal shear in the panel-zone section.

Results
Panel Zone

RAM Structural System

Diagonal Stiffener Reqd to Resist = The horizontal shear force that the diagonal
stiffeners are required to resist.

105

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Member Forces
Required
Stiffener
Area

This is the total area of the two stiffeners required at a location to meet the bearing
and tension requirements per 4.5.3.2 and 4.5.3.3. The reported area accounts for the
cope dimension, which reduces the area of the stiffener at the column flange. The
smaller of the column and the stiffener yield strength is used to calculate the required
area. Note the stiffener yield strength specified by the engineer is not modified
according to the final thickness the stiffener.

Stiffener Design
Where a full-length stiffener is required to resist web buckling, then the design is performed according
to specification 4.5.2.3. The stiffener column dimensions are calculated as prescribed in these sections.
The smaller of the column design yield strength and the stiffener nominal yield strength is used to
perform the check according to 4.5.2.3. Refer to the technical notes and the joint criteria section for
more information on the stiffener design.

4.6.10 Eurocode 3: BS EN 1993-1-8:2005

All output is the same as AISC ASD/LRFD unless noted otherwise in this section.

Panel Zone
Where required the web plate is sized to be equal to the column web thickness, but is rounded up to the
closest web plate increment (as entered by the user in the criteria-joints dialog). For design purposes
only the thickness of the plate equal to the thickness of the web of the column is considered. In some
rare circumstances the program may indicate that an adequate web plate cannot be designed, but the
report will show that the provided web thickness exceeds that required. Refer to the technical section
for a detailed explanation of why this might occur.

Stiffener Design
The design parameters used to design the stiffeners as columns are reported. Note that while Lamda
major is reported, the capacity of the stiffener Nb.Rd is calculated only based on the out-of-plane
(Lamda minor) bending.

4.7 Member Forces

The Member Forces report in Steel-Standard Provision Mode lists the member force results for a single
member for all the selected load combinations (user-defined and generated) in this mode. It also
includes member information and the analysis criteria.
This report can be printed for one member at a time (Single), for all members in a fenced area (Fence),
all members of a specified frame number (Frame), all members currently visible on the screen (Current
View) or for all members in the model (All). A separate output for each member is created. A report for
all members in a model can be quite lengthy. See the RAM Frame manual Reports chapter for a
description of the various elements of this report.

RAM Structural System

106

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Member Force Summary

4.8 Member Force Summary

The Member Force summary report in Steel-Standard Provision Mode lists the member force results for
all selected members for all the selected load combinations (user-defined and generated) in this mode.
It also includes member information, the analysis criteria, and a list of load cases analyzed.
This report can be printed for all members of a specified frame number (Frame). A report for all
members in a model can be quite lengthy depending on the number of load combinations. See the RAM
Frame manual Reports chapter for a description of the various elements of this report.

4.9 Member Force Envelope

The Member Forces Envelope report in Steel-Standard Provision Mode lists the maximum and minimum
member force results for all the selected load combinations (user-defined and generated) in this mode.
It includes member information, the analysis criteria and a list of load cases analyzed.
This report can be printed for one member at a time (Single), for all members in a fenced area (Fence),
all members of a specified frame number (Frame), all members currently visible on the screen (Current
View) or for all members in the model (All). A separate output for each member is created. A report for
all members in a model can be quite lengthy. See the RAM Frame manual Reports chapter for a
description of the various elements of this report.

RAM Structural System

107

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Standard Provisions Reports

Member Force Envelope

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

108

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

While the standard provision specifications address the ability of the steel members to adequately resist
all the forces applied to the structure, the special seismic provisions ensure that the building is
appropriately designed, proportioned and detailed to resist seismic loading in a ductile and life-safe
manner. Therefore, the purpose of the Special Seismic Provision Post-Processors is to investigate each
steel frame member and restrained (fixed) beam-column joint for the design and detailing requirements
of the selected steel design specification.
The special seismic provisions are not meant to supplant the standard provision checks, in fact, the
special seismic provisions depend on forces and combinations generated to perform standard provision
checks. To this end the special seismic and the standard provision checks are tightly linked. Changes in
forces, combinations, member sizes, criteria when in standard provision mode will change the available
options and the results when in seismic provision mode.
The seismic specifications currently implemented are the American Institute of Steel Construction Inc,
(ANSI341-05) 2005 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings ASD and LRFD (Including
Supplement No 1, November 2005), Steel Construction Inc, (ANSI341-02) 2002 Seismic Provisions for
Structural Steel Buildings LRFD, (AISC) 1997 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings LRFD
(Supplement No.2), the Uniform Building Code (UBC) 1997 Section 2210, Seismic Provisions for
Structural Steel Buildings LRFD, and UBC 1997 Section 2212, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings ASD.
Using Code-generated and/or user-defined load combinations the detailing and strength requirements
are checked for each member and valid joints, and the results displayed graphically. In addition to the
screen display, several output reports are also available.

5.1 Modes
RAM Frame is divided into three modes; Analysis mode (as described previously), Steel Mode (the
Seismic Provision sub-mode which is described here) and the Drift Control mode. To access the Steel
Seismic Provision Mode select the Mode-Steel-Seismic Provision command. This mode can also be
entered by selecting the Steel mode and Seismic Provision sub-mode from the dropdown controls
located on the dialog bar below the toolbars.
Note that to access the Seismic Provision mode the engineer must first select the AISC ASD or LRFD steel
design code in the Standard Provision Mode. Also, at least one selected load combination in the standard
provision mode must contain a seismic load case.
On initially entering Seismic Provision mode the Design Code dialog will automatically appear. The
engineer selects their desired design code and associated design options in this dialog. This dialog can
be displayed at any time when in this mode by selecting the Criteria-Codes command.

RAM Structural System

109

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Load Combinations

5.2 Load Combinations

Load combinations can be generated by the program and/or defined by the engineer. Load
combinations must be defined before any post-processing can be done.
The load combinations generated and created in this mode are only used where the selected code
requires that the Special (Amplified) Seismic Load Combinations be applied. For AISC341-05 these
Amplified Load Combinations refers to the combinations referenced in Section 4.1. The ASCE 7-05
amplified seismic combinations have been provided. In AISC 2002 (ANSI341-02) the term Special
Seismic Load Combinations refers to the combinations referenced in section 4.1, for AISC 1997 they
refer to load combinations 4-1 and 4-2, for UBC 1997 LRFD this refers to load combinations 3-7 and 3-8,
while for UBC 1997 ASD this refers to load combinations described in section 2213.5.1. It is important to
note that a large portion of the checks performed in the Seismic Provision mode use the load
combinations defined in the Steel-Standard Provision Mode. The engineer should ensure that the
currently selected standard provision load combinations (generated and custom) are appropriate for
the checks to be performed in the Seismic Provision mode.
The provisions of AISC341-05 are written for consistency with load combinations given in ASCE 7 (ASCE
2005) and IBC (ICC 2006). The provisions of AISC 2002 and 1997 are written for consistency with load
combinations given in ASCE 7 (ASCE 2002) and IBC (ICC 2000). While AISC 2002 refers to the applicable
building code as the source of the load combinations they should be consistent with the codes above to
be applicable to the design provisions. Refer to the Section C4 in the commentary of the AISC 2002
specification for more information.
After the Seismic Design Code dialog is closed the Load Combination Generation dialog box appears.
This dialog is used to show the Special Seismic Load Combinations automatically generated by the
program. The combinations generated are based on those load cases previously analyzed and selected
in this dialog. The engineer can select to include any or none of the load cases in the generated list of
combinations. Click the Apply button after selecting the appropriate load cases to automatically
generate and view load combinations in this dialog. After load combinations are generated the engineer
can decide which combinations to consider in the design. All rows of load combinations with the Use
check box selected will be considered during post-processing.
When this dialog is closed the user can return to view or change their combinations by selecting the
Combinations-Generate command.
Custom load combinations (where the user can select their own load factors) can be generated in the
dialog displayed by selecting Combinations-Custom. Note that combinations created in any other mode
are not automatically available in this mode, but must be copied and pasted into the appropriate mode if
required.
Once load combinations have been defined and selected, the Process menu commands become
available. The Code Check, View/Update and Report commands can then be used as described in the
next several sections.

5.2.1 Generated Load Combinations

Refer to 2.4.1 Generated Load Combinations for additional information on generated load combinations.
Note that the load combinations generated in this mode are only applied where the special amplified
seismic load combinations are referenced in the selected design code. The system over-strength factor

RAM Structural System

110

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Criteria
(Omega) is required to automatically generate the seismic design load combinations. Omega is based on
the building frame type and should be taken from the appropriate building code.
For a structure that contains frames of more than one type (with different omega factors) the engineer
will have to repeat the post-processing checks. The omega factor for a single frame type should be used
to generate load combinations and the associated frames should be checked. This process should be
repeated for each frame type.

5.2.2 Custom Load Combinations

Refer to Section Custom Load Combinations for additional information on custom load combinations.

5.3 Criteria
Below is a brief description of the global criteria that pertain to the Member and Joint Code Checks
performed by all the design specifications. Technical descriptions of how each criterion is used in the
Code Check are provided later in the manual. Most of these criteria are the same as that specified in the
Standard Provision Mode (Refer to 2.5 Design Criteria). Only the code criteria dialog offers additional
options, which are described below. Note that any changes to the criteria will invalidate not only the
code checks already performed in this mode, but in the Standard Provision mode also.
The Criteria menu commands are divided into three sections based on functionality. Namely there is a
code command, followed by the group of member criteria items, followed by the joint criteria items.
Only the code command is discussed below as the other commands remain mostly unchanged from the
Standard Provision Mode.

5.3.1 Codes
On initially entering Steel-Seismic Provision Mode, the engineer is presented a Seismic Design Code.
This dialog can subsequently be displayed by selecting the Criteria-Codes command.
The choice of codes available to the engineer in this dialog is based on the steel design code specified in
the standard provision mode. Strength seismic provision codes (AISC341-05 LRFD, UBC 1997 LRFD,
AISC-1997, AISC-2002) will be available if LRFD is the steel design code selected in standard provision
mode. Similarly AISC341-05 ASD, UBC 1997 ASD will be available if ASD is the steel design code
selected in standard provision mode. This is because many of the checks performed in the seismic mode
are dependent on the load combinations created in the standard provision mode.
Depending on the seismic code selected different options will be made available to the engineer. A
description of all the options follows.
Apply One-andTwo Story
Exceptions

RAM Structural System

This option typically applies to braced frame structures. Several of the design
provisions provide exceptions if the structure is a low building (one-or two stories
in height). Checking this option will indicate to the program that these exceptions
are appropriate for this structure. If this option is selected then where applicable

111

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Criteria
and necessary the exception will be attempted. For AISC341-05 this criteria is only
applicable to the exception for the column-beam moment ratio.
Use Frame Nos.
to Designate a
Frame Line

This option applies to several of the braced frame types. While most of the seismic
checks are performed on individual structural members, some are performed on
complete frames. By applying unique frame numbers to members of individual
braced frames, and checking this option, RAM Frame will perform these complete
frame checks.

Perform FEMA
350

This option applies only to special moment resisting frames. When checked, the
AISC 1997 and UBC1997 panel-zone and strong-column-weak-beam checks will be
superseded by the equivalent checks in the Federal Emergency Management
publication 350. If reduced beam sections are applied to beams they will be
considered.

Use AISC358-05 Applicable only when AISC 341-05 is selected. This option indicates the provisions
RBS Moment
of AISC358-05 with respect to Beam Limitations, Column Limitations and Joint
Connection
(Beam-Column Limitations) will be verified for SMF and where applicable IMF
frame members and joints. Selection of this option provides the user the ability to
designate.
Zone

The seismic zone of the structure. Affects which checks are performed for each
frame type, as described in the associated building code.

Importance
Factor

The importance factor assigned to the structure. Affects which checks are
performed for each frame type, as described in the associated building code.

Over-Strength
Factor / Cpr
Factor

This factor is used where required by the code to increase the yield strength of
beams to ultimate levels. Only where specifically required by the code will the
over-strength factor be applied. For example UBC 1997 refers to the over-strength
factor in section 2213.7.5. For the AISC 1997/2002/2005 provisions this value is
calculated by the program (Ry) and is based on the yield strength of the base
material (according to the specification). For AISC341-05 if Use AISC358-05 RBS
Moment Connection is selected this option is required to designate the factor to
account for peak connection strength per 2.4.3 of AISC 358-05.

EBF-Cd Factor

(AISC 1997/2002/2005 Only)

This factor is used in accordance with AISC97/02 section 15.2g, AISC 341-05 15.2c,
where the design story drift is required. RAM Frame considers the design story
drift as Cd times the elastic story drift. Refer to the technical section and the AISC
commentary for additional information.
Selecting the option Show this dialog when entering Seismic Provision Mode will
automatically display the code dialog each time the seismic provision mode is
entered.

5.3.2 ASD/LRFD Criteria

Refer to AISC ASD / LRFD Criteria for additional information on the steel design criteria associated with
calculating the allowable stress or capacity of a member. Only the column moments and joint forces
criteria in the standard provision mode are not applicable to the seismic provision mode.

RAM Structural System

112

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Assign Menu

5.4 Assign Menu

The engineer has the ability to assign several design criteria and properties to each individual member.
By selecting one of the Assign commands the appropriate criteria or property can be assigned to one or
members in the model. The assign options available to the engineer in this mode are typically organized
based on member type (beam, column or brace). Most of the assign options were described in Section
2.6 Assign in the Standard Provision chapter. Only the Assign Frame Type and Assign Frame Number
options are described below.

5.4.1 Frame Types

Selecting the Assign-Frame Types command causes the Assign Frame Types dialog box to be displayed.
From this dialog the engineer can assign frame types to all the Lateral Steel members. The engineer
must assign a Frame Type before a Code Check can be performed. The engineer should assign a frame
type to all the members of the frame. For example, the concentric frame designation should be assigned
to the beams, columns and the braces of a concentric braced frame. If the engineer does not want the
program to check an individual member then the member should have no type assigned to it. Note that
the available frame types are dependent on the selected seismic provisions code. Note that the EBF
frame type is only available if AISC 1997, AISC 2002 or AISC341-05 is the selected seismic code. A
member code check can be performed for frame type BRB and BRB-V when a Star Seismic BRB size is
assigned.
After the appropriate frame type is selected from the dialog the engineer can assign the criteria to a
single member (click on Single) or to multiple members (click on Fence). If Single is clicked the dialog
will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on each section to assign the frame type to. If
Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be made available. Click and drag a rectangle
around all the members to assign the frame type to.
To view member frame types select the appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog. If a frame
type is assigned and then the seismic code is changed, all frame types not valid in the new seismic code
will appear with a line drawn through the name.

5.4.2 Frame Numbers

Selecting the Assign-Frame Numbers command causes the Assign Lateral Frame Numbers dialog box
to be displayed. From this dialog the engineer can assign frame numbers to Lateral Frame members. The
primary purpose of the frame numbers is to group frame members for output purposes. In Seismic
Provision mode the frame numbers have design implications as described in the option Use Frame Nos.
to Designate a Frame Line described in Codes.
Enter a number in the Frame Number edit box to assign to members. Select the member types to assign
this frame number to by clicking the appropriate option box under the Assign To area. Note that
different member types, within the same frame, can be assigned different numbers.

RAM Structural System

113

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Process Menu
After the appropriate frame numbers and member types values are specified, the engineer can assign
the criteria to a single member (click on Single), to multiple members (click on Fence) or to all members
(click on All). If Single is clicked the dialog will close and a target cursor will be made available. Click on
each
section to assign the Frame Number to. If Fence is clicked the dialog will close and a fence cursor will be
made available. Click and drag a rectangle around all the members to assign the Frame Number to.
To view member frame numbers select the appropriate option from the View-Members Dialog.

5.5 Process Menu

The Seismic Steel Post Processor has four actions that can be selected from the Process menu, these
include Member View/Update, Joint View/Update, Member Code Check and Joint Code Check.

5.5.1 Member View/Update

The Process-Member View/Update command is a powerful feature that allows the user to view
detailed results of the design and detailing checks performed on the member for the currently selected
seismic code (in Criteria-Code command). If desired the member size and yield strength can be
modified and the Code Check repeated. The modified data can then be saved to the database without
requiring returning to the RAM Modeler.
When the View/Update command is issued, the target cursor appears with which the user selects the
frame member on which the Seismic Code Check is to be performed. The steel seismic provision
member Code Check is then performed on the selected member. The check is performed for all the
selected standard provision mode load combinations, as well as all the selected seismic mode load
combinations where specified in the seismic code. The result of each check performed (including the
code section), are displayed in the results list. The result of each check is indicated in the form of an icon
in row of the performed check, in the dialog results list. Double-click on a particular check to get a brief
description of the icon displayed for that check. The icons are discussed briefly at the end of this section
(refer to 5.5.5 View/Update Result Icons). The header of this dialog box provides information about the
frame member selected: floor type, member number, story level, and span coordinates.
The currently assigned member size appears in the drop down Member Size control, along with the
members yield strength. The results of all the Seismic Code Checks for that member are represented by
the stoplight color. If green the member successfully met all the requirements of the seismic code. If
yellow then there are one or more seismic code checks that could not be performed and the engineer is
responsible for completing. The results will clearly state which checks were not performed. If the
stoplight is red then one or more of the seismic checks failed on that member.
Changes can be made to the member size by selecting any size in the dropdown list, or to the yield
strength by editing the value, and the member Code Check re-run by clicking the Analyze button. The
results in the result list and the stoplight will be updated based on the results of the new Code Check.
The modified member size and yield strength can be saved to the database using the Update Data Base
button. When the database is changed in this way, the status indicator light at the right end of the status
bar turns yellow. The model should be reanalyzed to calculate an accurate distribution of forces.

RAM Structural System

114

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Process Menu
The View Results button causes the Seismic Provision Member Code Check output to appear on the
screen. It is a detailed report of the Seismic Code Check results. The report includes design parameters
and criteria, the controlling load combinations, calculated stresses and capacities, and the result of all
checks performed.

5.5.2 Member Code Check

The Process - Member Code Check command causes the design and detailing checks to be performed
on all steel frame members of the structure. The check is performed for all the selected standard
provision mode load combinations, as well as all the selected seismic mode load combinations where
specified in the seismic code.
Once the Code Check is complete, the model is drawn on the screen with members color-coded to
indicate the status of each member. A color chart correlates member color with the status. This display
reflects the controlling condition for each member based on all the checks performed on each member.

5.5.3 Joint View/Update

The Process-Joint View/Update command is a powerful feature that allows the user to view detailed
results of the design and detailing checks performed on a restrained (moment, rigid) joint, for the
currently selected seismic code. If desired the column size and yield strength can be modified and the
Code Check repeated. The modified data can then be saved to the database without requiring returning
to the RAM Modeler.
Selecting Joint View/Update causes the target cursor to appear. Click the target cursor on a steel joint.
This will cause the Joint View/Update dialog box to appear. The steel seismic provision joint Code Check
is then performed based on the frame type of the column at the joint. For example, if the column is
assigned a Special Moment Frame Type, and the beams Ordinary Moment Frame Type, then the joint is
checked as a Special Moment Frame Joint (Same as column). The check is performed for all the selected
standard provision mode load combinations, as well as all the selected seismic mode load combinations
where specified in the seismic code.
The result of each check performed (including the code section), are displayed in the result list. The
result of each check is indicated in the results list in the form of an icon in the row of the performed
check. Double-click on a particular check to get a brief description of the icon displayed for that check.
The icons are discussed briefly at the end of this section (refer to View/Update Result Icons). The
header of this dialog box provides information about the frame member selected: floor type, member
number, story level, and span coordinates.
The currently assigned column size appears in the drop down Column Size control, along with the
column yield strength. The results of all the Seismic Code Checks for that joint are represented by the
stoplight color. If green the joint successfully met all the requirements of the seismic code. If yellow then
there are one or more seismic code checks that could not be performed and the engineer is responsible
for completing. The results will clearly state which checks were not performed. If the stoplight is red
then one or more of the seismic checks failed on that joint.
Changes can be made to the member size by selecting any size in the dropdown list, or to the yield
strength by editing the value, and the member Code Check re-run by clicking the Analyze button. The
results in the results list and the stoplight will be updated based on the results of the new Code Check.

RAM Structural System

115

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Process Menu
Once a satisfactory joint column member has been found, click the Update Database button to save it.
Notice that when a new size is saved to the database the status indicator light turns yellow and a
reanalysis is suggested to obtain accurate member forces.
The View Results button causes the Seismic Provision Joint Code Check output to appear on the screen.
It is a detailed report of the Seismic Code Check results. The report includes design parameters and
criteria, the controlling load combinations, calculated stresses and capacities, and the result of all checks
performed.

5.5.4 Joint Code Check

The Process-Joint Code Check command causes all lateral I-Section moment (rigid) connection joints
to be evaluated based on the selected seismic design specification and frame type. The check is
performed for all the selected standard provision mode load combinations, as well as all the selected
seismic mode load combinations where specified in the seismic code. Refer to Assumptions and
Limitations, for the criteria by which the joints are validated and checked.
Once the Code Check is complete, the model is drawn on the screen with joints color-coded to indicate
the status of each member. A color chart correlates member color with the status. This display reflects
the controlling condition for each joint based on all the checks performed on each joint.
No Joint Code Checks are performed for hanging.

5.5.5 View/Update Result Icons

An icon that represents the result of each seismic check appears in each row in the results list of the
View/Update dialog. Double-click on a particular row to get a brief description of the icon displayed for
that check.
Icon

Description
This icon represents that information is going to be provided to the user. For
example, this result will appear if the engineer performs a view update on a
member to which no frame type has been assigned. Refer to Frame Types for
how to assign frame types to members prior to performing a view update.

Information Only

Detailing
Requirements Only

RAM Structural System

This icon represents the fact that this check is a detailing requirement. For
these checks RAM Frame will provide the engineer with any required values
to assist them in completing the detailing requirement. The member cannot
fail because of these type checks.

116

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

The Design Process
Icon

Caution

Additional Check
Required

No Good, Exception
Not Attempted
(Yellow)

Description
This icon represents a check that could not be performed by RAM Frame
because some unusual situation was encountered. It is the engineers
responsibility to perform these additional checks. For example, a joint check
where the joint is invalid (Refer to Assumptions and Limitations) will cause
this result.
This icon represents a check that could not be completed. It is the engineers
responsibility to perform these additional checks. For these checks RAM
Frame will provide the engineer with most of the information required to
complete this check.

This icon represents a check that was unsuccessful, but one or more
exception could not be performed. RAM Frame will try and exhaust all
possibilities (attempt all exceptions) before failing a member or joint. If the
member fails all the checks RAM Frame performs, but one or more
exceptions could not be performed then Caution Failure is reported. If the
engineer can successfully perform the exception then this member may be
acceptable.
This icon represents a check that was unsuccessful. All exceptions for that
check were also performed and failed. RAM Frame will try and exhaust all
possibilities (attempt all exceptions) before failing a member or joint.

No Good (Red)
Successful

This icon represents a check that was successful.

Note: Some checks may contain a - to the left of the icon. The symbol represents the fact that this
check has another check as an exception. The first subsequent result listed in the results lists without
the - is that exception check. Therefore, if a check fails but has a - symbol, and the exception check is
OK, then that member will be acceptable and the stoplight will be green.

5.6 The Design Process

The design of a structural steel building is iterative in nature. The engineer is responsible for meeting
the requirements of several specifications. It is customary for the engineer to initially proportion and
design members to adequately resist the applied gravity and lateral loads. Within the context of the
RAM Structural System this is performed in the standard provision mode. The engineer can then check
the structure in the seismic provision mode for compliance with the requirements of the appropriate
special seismic provision code.

RAM Structural System

117

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

The Design Process
Initially member sizes are assigned to frame members in the RAM Modeler, or for steel beams and
columns, by performing a Design All in the RAM Steel Beam and Column Design module.
Load cases are defined and an initial analysis is run in Analysis mode. The engineer switches to SteelStandard Provision mode, selects a steel design code and performs a member and/or joint code check.
The engineer can then use the tools available in the Steel - Standard Provision mode to adequately size
the steel beams, columns and braces of the structure, to resist the applied gravity and lateral loads.
Once adequate member sizes are assigned the engineer can switch to the Steel - Seismic Provision mode
to check the selected members against the requirements of the selected Seismic specification.
On initially entering Steel Seismic Provision Mode the engineer is required to select a special seismic
provision code. The choice of codes available to the engineer is based on the steel design code specified
in the standard provision mode. Strength seismic provision codes (UBC 1997 LRFD, AISC 1997, AISC
341-02 and AISC341-05 LRFD) will be available if LRFD is the steel design code selected in standard
provision mode. Similarly AISC341-05 ASD or UBC 1997 ASD will be available if ASD is the steel design
code selected in standard provision mode. Depending on the seismic code selected different options will
be made available to the engineer on this dialog. Refer to Codes for a description of all the options
available.
When the code dialog is closed the load combination dialog will automatically appear. This dialog is
used to generate the special seismic provision load combinations. These combinations only apply to
those checks that explicitly specify their use (refer to Load Combinations).
Note that for many of the seismic checks the standard provision load combinations are used. For those
checks RAM Frame uses the valid (selected and available) generated and custom combinations from the
Standard Provision Mode.
Before performing a code check on the structure the engineer is responsible for specifying the frame
type of each structural steel member. Each frame member is assigned a frame type by selecting the
command Assign-Frame Type, choosing the appropriate frame type from the available types, and
assigning the type to the appropriate members. The engineer should refer to the appropriate building
code for details on classification of frames. All the members that comprise a single frame should be
assigned the same frame type. That is, the columns, beams and braces of a braced frame should all be
assigned the same frame type. The same is true for a moment frame structure. The model will now be
available to perform special seismic provision checks.
For the member and joint code check the color-coding identifies the status of the member or joint for all
the seismic checks performed. The members and joints can then be investigated on an individual basis,
and resized using the View/Update command until a suitable design is found. The new size is then saved
to the database using the Update Database command in View/Update. Sizes can also be assigned to
members using the assign size commands (from the Assign-Beam/Column/Brace-Size command) in
this mode.
Once the status of all the members are acceptable to the engineer the structure should be reanalyzed in
Analysis Mode. This is to obtain a valid analysis (member forces) based on any new sizes. Once
reanalyzed the Standard Provision member and joint code check should be performed again before
returning to the Special Provision Mode. In Seismic Provision mode the members and joints should be
rechecked (Process-Member Code Check, Process-Joint Code Check). It is possible that the status of
some members or joints will now be unacceptable. This is because of the redistribution of forces caused
by the new sizes. If so, they can be modified once again with the View/Update command, and the
process repeated.
This process of analyzing, standard and seismic code checking and modifying is repeated until all
members are within the limits acceptable to the engineer.

RAM Structural System

118

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Exiting and Changing Modes

5.7 Exiting and Changing Modes

To switch to Analysis Mode
1. Select the Mode-Analysis-Load Cases command.
Alternatively select Analysis from the Mode dropdown control available on the dialog bar below the
toolbar.

5.7.1 To switch to Steel-Standard Provision Mode

1. Select the Mode-Steel-Standard Provision command.
Alternatively, select the Standard Provision item from the dropdown control on the dialog bar below
the toolbar.

5.7.2 To exit RAM Frame

1. Do either of the following:
Double clicking the Control Bar in the upper left corner of the RAM Frame Window or alternatively
click the Control Bar and selecting the Close command from the drop down menu.
or
Select the File - Exit command.

RAM Structural System

119

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Post-Processors

Exiting and Changing Modes

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

120

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Seismic code-check capabilities are available for steel members and moment frame joints. The seismic
provision checks include checking the member design and detailing requirements against the
requirements of the selected seismic code.
Note that for CAN/CSA S16-01, the Seismic Design Requirements of Chapter 27 have not been
implemented.
Steel Design Codes
The seismic steel post-processors are based on the requirements of the code specifications published
by:
The International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) as found in the 1997 Uniform Building Code,
Volume 2,
American Institute of Steel Construction as found in Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings.
These specifications include:
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
(2005, ANSI/AISC 341-05, March 9, 2005, including supplement No.1 Dated November 16, 2005)
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
(2002, ANSI 341-02, May 21, 2002)
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
(April 15, 1997)
Uniform Building Code 1997 Section 2212, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design.
Uniform Building Code 1997 Section 2210, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings Load
and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings.
The requirements of the latest Supplement to the AISC 341-05 requirements have been implemented:
AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. Supplement No.1. (November 16, 2005).
The requirements of the latest Supplement to the AISC 1997 requirements have been implemented:
AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (1997) Supplement No.2. (February 1999).
The requirements of the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency Guidelines have been
implemented for UBC 1997 LRFD and AISC 1997:
FEMA 350, Recommended Seismic Criteria for New Steel Moment-Frame Buildings, (July 2000),
including June 18, 2001 errata.
When selected by the user the provisions from this code can be checked in lieu of the equivalent UBC 97
or AISC 1997 provisions.

RAM Structural System

121

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Load Combinations

6.1 Load Combinations

The special seismic load combinations required by the specified Building Code or Standard are
generated automatically by the program. The seismic load combinations are generated automatically
based on the selected seismic code. The generated load combinations are those required by the seismic
code when the ultimate seismic force is being calculated.
For AISC 341-05 ASD the load combinations referred to in section 4.1 are taken from ASCE 7-05/IBC
2006 (12.4.3.2) and represent:
( 1.0 + 0.14 * Sds )D 0.7 o QE
( 1.0 + 0.105 * Sds )D 0.525 o QE + 0.75 L + 0.75(Lr or S)
( 0.6 0.14 * Sds )D 0.7 o QE
For AISC 341-05 LRFD the load combinations referred to in section 4.1 are taken from ASCE 7-05/IBC
2006 (12.4.3.2) and represent:
( 1.2 + 0.2 * Sds )D + (1.0 or 0.5)L + 0.2 S o QE
( 0.9 0.2 * Sds )D o QE
For AISC 2002 the load combinations referred to in section 4.1 are taken from IBC 2000/2003 and
represent:
( 1.2 + 0.2 * Sds )D + 0.5L + ( 0.2 or 0.7 ) S o QE
( 0.9 0.2 * Sds )D o QE
For AISC 1997 the load combinations refer to the load combinations 4-1 and 4-2 as follows:
1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S o QE

(4-1)

0.9D o QE

(4-2)

For UBC 1997 LRFD the load combinations refer to the load combinations 3-7 and 3-8 as follows:
1.2D + 0.5L o QE

(3-7)

0.9D o QE

(3-8)

For UBC 1997 ASD the load combinations refer to the load combinations defined in section 2213.5.1 as
follows:
1.0D + 0.7L o QE

(5-1)

0.85D o QE

(5-2)

It is important to note that a large portion of the checks performed in the Seismic Provision mode use
the load combinations defined in the Steel-Standard Provision Mode. The engineer should ensure that
the currently selected standard provision load combinations (generated and custom) are appropriate
for the checks to be performed in the Seismic Provision mode.
Dynamic and Other load cases are not included in the generated combinations but can by used in
combinations created by the user. The user can create any number of additional load combinations.

RAM Structural System

122

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
When creating user-specified load combinations, the plus and minus combinations should both be
explicitly created. The load factors should be normalized as explained above.

6.2 Code Check

The seismic provisions can typically be broken into those checks that apply to individual members
(columns, beams, and braces), a group of members (columns and beams at a joint) or to whole
structural systems (individual frames or the entire building). RAM Frame has broken the provisions into
those that apply to members and those that apply to joints. Checks on entire frames or the structure as a
whole are grouped into the individual member or joint checks where required.
Note that many of the seismic requirements are related to seismic detailing. RAM Frame provides
information where possible to enable the engineer to complete the detailing requirements. For example,
while RAM Frame does not currently design connections, the required connection forces will be
reported to the engineer in the output. The engineer should refer to the applicable seismic code for
those detailing and design requirements not currently addressed by RAM Frame.
Note that no standard provision checks are performed in seismic provision mode. The engineer is
responsible for confirming that all the members are capable of resisting the standard provision load
combinations. Only the added provisions are performed in the special seismic mode.
The engineer should refer to Member Code Check, for a description of how member allowable stress and
capacity values are calculated for the individual members. Note that changes made to criteria in seismic
mode will invalidate the results of the standard provision mode and require the engineer to redo the
code check in the standard provision mode.
Note: The symbol is used in this chapter to indicate references to the specifications.

6.2.1 Assumptions and Limitations

The special seismic provisions are typically prescriptive in nature and are sometimes open to
interpretation by the engineer. This section provides the engineer with information on how RAM Frame
has implemented many of the specification requirements. Specifically it attempts to identify all the
assumptions that are made by the program, and list some of the limitations. The engineer is encouraged
to refer to the actual code requirements in the applicable code as most of the nomenclature used below
is taken directly out of the applicable code.
The engineer is responsible for performing all code requirements that are not performed by RAM
Frame.
In this section the assumptions and limitations are organized according to the actual code section
referenced. That is, each section is numbered according to the section in the code that is being
discussed.

RAM Structural System

123

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

6.2.2 Reduced Beam Section Check

RAM Frame now performs a check of all beams that have reduced beam sections to verify that the beam
has the capacity to carry the bending moment that occurs at the center of the reduced beam section, due
to all standard provision load combinations. Refer to beam output to see the results of this design check.

6.2.3 AISC 2005/2010 (ANSI 341-05/10) ASD and LRFD

Note: AISC 2010 (ANSI 341-10) references placed in [ ] immediately follow the AISC 2005 (ANSI
341-05) references.

Limitations
With the exception of the AISC 360-10 steel design code, the AISC 341-05 code check will always use the
AISC 360-05 steel design code to perform any member design capacity calculations, irrespective of the
selected code in the Steel Standard Provision mode. That is, if AISC LRFD 3rd is selected in Standard
mode but AISC 341-05 LRFD is the selected code in Seismic Mode code, then all member capacities will
be calculated using AISC 360-05 LRFD, not AISC LRFD 3rd. Conversely, when AISC 360-10 LRFD is
selected in the Standard mode but AISC 341-05 LRFD is selected in Seismic Mode code, then all member
capacities will be calculated using AISC 360-10 LRFD.
A few individual checks are not performed. When a check is necessary and is not performed by the
program it will be indicated in the output.
It is recommended that P-Delta be performed in lieu of using B2 when performing an AISC 341-05
design check.

3.[B1] General Seismic Design Requirements

The user is not required to assign a seismic category. If the engineer selects to use this code then all the
provisions are assumed to be applicable.

4.[B2] Loads, Load Combinations, and Nominal Strengths

Where standard provision load combinations are referred to (such as in Section 4.1 in regard to the
applicable building code), RAM Frame will use the current load combinations from the standard
provision mode. The engineer is responsible for ensuring that an appropriate set of loads and
combinations are defined in the standard provision mode prior to switching to special seismic mode and
performing a code check. Amplified Seismic load combinations as referenced in section 4.1 are
generated within this mode.
For member code checks of SCBF and BRBF column frame types using the AISC 341-10 code, a set of
generated load combinations independent of the user generated combinations are evaluated. The set of
combinations use (+ 1.0 Emh) for LRFD and (+ 0.7 Emh) for the ASD code as the seismic term in
combinations with the analyzed gravity load cases. Emh is determined using the analysis conditions
specified in Section F2.3 and F4.3 of AISC 341-10 for SCBF and BRBF columns respectively.

RAM Structural System

124

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
Note: It is recommended that generated seismic combinations are created to ensure that correct
parameters (Sds etc.) are used. For models without generated seismic load combinations (where only
custom seismic load combinations are defined), combinations are internally generated assuming the
default template values.
The provisions of AISC 2005 and AISC 2010 are written for consistency with load combinations given in
ASCE 7 and IBC (ICC 2006 and ICC 2009). While AISC 341-05 refers to the applicable building code as
the source of the load combinations they should be consistent with the codes above to be applicable to
the design provisions. Refer to Sections C4 and B2, respectively, in the commentaries of the AISC 2005
and AISC 2010 specifications for more information.
Nominal strengths are based on the following specifications:
ANSI/AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (June 22, 2010), published by the
American Institute of Steel Construction in Steel Construction Manual (14th Edition).
ANSI/AISC 360-05, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (March 9, 2005), published by the
American Institute of Steel Construction in Steel Construction Manual (13th Edition).

6.[A3] Materials
6.1 Material Specification
No steel grade is specified in RAM Frame and as such the engineer is responsible for ensuring
compliance with this provision.

6.2 Material Properties for Determination of Required Strength of Connections or Related

Members
The Ry values are calculated according to Table I-6-1. Note that all Hollow Structural Sections (HSS and
TS) are assigned a Ry of 1.4, Pipe (CHS) sections an Ry of 1.6 and for other rolled sections Ry is based on
the engineer specified yield strength as follows:
36ksi Ry = 1.5
42ksi Ry = 1.3
All others Ry = 1.1
Ry = 1.0 for SidePlate Connections

8.[D] Members
8.2 Local Buckling
Only where specifically required by the specification and footnotes to Table I-8-1 are the members
checked against the limiting width to thickness rations of Table I-8-1 and AISC 360 Table B4.1.
Where applicable, Pu (LRFD) and Pa (ASD) are taken as the maximum axial tension and compression
force on the member from all the selected standard provision load combinations.
The calculation of the b/t, d/t, and h/t ratios are based on the AISC 360 specification.
Note that for webs of beams in Special Moment Frames (SMF) there are some conflicting limits. The
program will limit the section web to the smaller of :

RAM Structural System

125

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
2.45 Es / F y
and
1.12

Es
Fy

2.33 Ca

[D1.1b] Width-to-Thickness Limitations of Steel and Composite Sections

AISC 341-10, members are checked against the limiting width to thickness ratios of Highly Ductile or
Moderately Ductile Members of Table D1.1.

8.3 [D1.4a] Column Strength

AISC 341-10
The amplified load combinations are utilized to calculate Pu (LRFD) and Pa (ASD).
AISC 341-05
This provision is applied to all columns, irrespective of frame type. The standard provision load
combinations are utilized to calculate Pu (LRFD) and Pa (ASD).
When Pu/Pn > 0.4 (LRFD) or cPa/Pn (ASD) the amplified seismic load combinations generated in the
seismic provision mode (see 4. above) are used to determine the required compressive and tensile
strength.
The limiting provisions of 8.3(2) are not applied which could result in conservative axial forces being
considered in 8.3(1).

8.4 [E2.6g] Column Splices

Detailing information regarding the magnitude of the required splice force to be designed and detailed
are calculated and presented. The engineer is responsible for the design of the splice connection
components.

8.5 Column Bases

No calculations or information is provided with respect to column base design. Refer to the specification
for additional information or requirements.

9.[E3] Special Moment Frames (SMF)

9.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
Connections in Special moment frames require pre-qualification according to Section 9.2b achieving the
performance requirements of 9.2a. The engineer is referred to 9.2b which references AISC 358-05 as
a source for several connections that are considered pre-qualified.
When calculating the required shear strength per 9.2a (9-1) all standard provision load combinations
with seismic load cases are considered, replacing the seismic load case and factor with the force
produced from a term 1.0E where E = 2.0 [1.1 Ry Mpr] / L. The 1.0 load factor will replace the load
factor associated with the seismic load case in the underlying load combination. L is taken as the
distance between reduced beam sections, if they exist, otherwise L is the distance between the face of

RAM Structural System

126

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
the columns supporting the beams. Mpr is the ultimate strength of the beam in bending at the reduced
beam section, if it exists, otherwise it is from the full beam section.
Note: For ASD the Mpr term is not divided by (1.5) as is typically performed in other similar
calculations such as 9.3a. This may produce conservative shear forces for ASD design if the factor is
then assigned to the capacity calculations. All SidePlate beam-to-column joints demonstrate
conformance with 9.2a as indicated in 9.2b per ICC-ES ESR-1275
All SidePlate beam-to-column joints demonstrate conformance with 9.2a as indicated in 9.2b per ICCES ESR-1275

358-05 5.8-6 [358-10 5.8-6] Moment force at Column Face

Where AISC358-05 Section 5.8-6 RBS Connection is designated in the Codes dialog box the maximum
force at the column face is calculated and checked relative to equation 5.8-6. If this check fails the RBS
dimensions can be adjusted or section size changed to meet this requirement. The load applied between
the face of the column and the RBS is not considered in the calculation of the maximum moment on the
face of the column.

9.3 [E3.6e] Panel-Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections

Only connections parallel to the column web are considered and checked by the program.
The required shear strength of the panel-zone is determined from the summation of moments at the
column faces as determined by projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge locations (RBS if
they exist) to the column faces. The material factor v = 1.0 (LRFD) and v = 1.50 (ASD) in all cases.
Note, for the determination of the panel zone forces the moment at the face of the column is calculated
as described above BUT for ASD the Mpr term is calculated as ( 1.1 / 1.5 ) Ry Fy (note the 1.5). This
produces equivalent level of design for ASD and LRFD panel zones.
If AISC 358-05 RBS Moment Frame Connections are designated in the Code Dialog then the 1.1 factor on
the Mpr calculation is replaced with the Cpr value provided by the user for Special Moment Frame joints.
Pu and Pa (for panel zone capacity calculation) is taken as the maximum axial load on the column at the
joint from all standard provision load combinations.
If the beams frame into the flange of the column at some angle other than parallel to the column web,
then the component of the beam force parallel to the column web is used. No torsion force in the beam,
should it exist, is resolved into a force on the face of the column if the beam is not parallel to the column
web.
Panel Zone shear is calculated as the moment divided by the distance between the center of the beam
flanges.
Note that the requirements of 9.3b are irrespective of the magnitude of the panel shear force. The
program can consider the use of plug-welds to reduce the required web plate thickness, refer to the
Criteria - Joints menu command to select this plug weld option.

9.4 Beam and Column Limitations

Refer to the requirements of 8.2b [D1.1b].
Per Table I-8-1 footnote 3, SMF columns will be checked to comply with ps in Table I-8-1 when
Equation 9-3 is less than 2.0, else they will be checked against AISC 360 Table B4.1.

RAM Structural System

127

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
If AISC 358-05 RBS Connections are designated by the engineer in the Codes dialog then the beam bf / 2
x tf value is performed based on the dimensions of the RBS per AISC 358-05 (6). The value bf shall not
be taken as less than the flange width at the ends of the center two-thirds of the reduced section.

358-05 5.3.1 [358-10 5.3.1] Beam Limitations

If AISC 358-05 Section 5.3.1 RBS Moment Connections are designated in the Codes dialog box then all
the additional Beam Limitation requirements of this section, beyond those of AISC 341-05, will be
performed. For 5.3.1(2) the beam depth will be used to assess if the section size exceeds the largest W36
section depth. It may be possible however that a beam with greater depth is appropriate (or shallower
depth inappropriate) if they are not pre-qualified.

358-05 5.3.2 [358-10 5.3.2] Column Limitations

If AISC358-05 Section 5.3.2 RBS Moment Connections are designated in the Codes dialog box then all the
additional Column Limitation requirements of this section, beyond those of AISC 341-05, will be
performed.

9.5 [E3.6f] Continuity Plates

If AISC358-05 RBS Connections are designated by the engineer in the Codes dialog then the AISC 358-05
2.4.4 requirements will be performed. In this check the program will assess the column dimensions and
indicate when stiffeners are required to be provided.

9.6 [E3.4a] Column-Beam Moment Ratio

The calculation of Mpb is determined by summing the projections of the expected beam flexural
strength(s). The applied loads between the RBS (if it exists) and the column face is not considered.
If the beams frame into the flange of the column at some angle other than parallel to the column web,
then the component of the beam force parallel to the column web is used to calculate Mpb
If no reduced beam section is specified on a member than the capacity of the full member is utilized.
If AISC 358-05 RBS Moment Frame Connections are designated in the Code Dialog then the 1.1 factor on
the Mpr calculation is replaced with the Cpr value provided by the user for Special Moment Frame joints.
If SidePlate Connections are designated in the Code Dialog then the 1.1 factor on the Mpr calculation is
replaced with 1.2 and the Strong Column Weak Beam check is performed as follows:
Z

)(

)(

Pu
h
f

c y
Ag h d pl dc / 2
1.21 f y Z b

Z c

fy
Pa
h

1.5
Ag h d pl dc 2
1.21

f Z
1.5 y b

> 1.0 for LRFD, and

> 1.0 for ASD

where
dpl
dc
h

=
=
=

depth of SidePlate
depth of column
average story height

For the Exception (if necessary) the design shear strength of a story is calculated as the component of
the major axis shear strength, of all the columns in the direction of the column under consideration,

RAM Structural System

128

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
added together. All columns, not only those columns of the special moment frame type, are considered.
The exception requiring consideration of only exempt columns is not considered.

9.7 [E3.4c(2)] Beam-To-Column Connection Restraint

A column will be assumed to remain elastic only if the ratio from Equation 9-3 is greater than 2.0.
A joint is considered restrained if contained within a deck, is a beam frames into the weak axis of the
column, or by the user specifying that the column is braced.
If the user indicates that the minor axis of the joint column is unbraced then the physical bracing (deck
or beams) is ignored and the joint is considered unrestrained.
The deck is only considered to brace the joint at the elevation of the top flange of the beams framing into
the flanges of the column.
If a beam (not a joist) is determined to frame into the minor axis of the column at the joint, then RAM
Frame assumes that the joint is restrained at the elevation of both the top and bottom flanges of the
framing beams.

9.8 [E3.4b] Lateral Support of Beams

Pertinent detailing information regarding stiffness and spacing of lateral bracing required of beams is
provided.
Beams framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace both the top and bottom flange of
the girder.
Joists framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace only the top flange of the girder.
If required the engineer can assign user brace points to all lateral beams to meet this provision. The user
brace points should represent actual physical bracing to be provided on the constructed beam.

10. [E2] Intermediate Moment Frames (IMF)

10.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
When calculating the required shear strength per 9.2a (by reference from 10.2) all standard provision
load combinations with seismic load cases are considered, replacing the seismic load case and factor
with the force produced from a term 1.0E where E = 2.0 [1.1 Ry Mpr] / L. The 1.0 load factor will replace
the load factor associated with the seismic load case in the underlying load combination. L is taken as
the distance between reduced beam sections, if they exist, otherwise L is the distance between the face
of the columns supporting the beams. Mpr is the ultimate strength of the beam in bending at the reduced
beam section, if it exists, otherwise it is from the full beam section.
Note: For ASD the Mpr term is not divided by (1.5) as is typically performed in other similar
calculations such as 9.3a. This may produce conservative shear forces for ASD design if the factor is
then assigned to the capacity calculations.
IMF connections are required to be prequalified, refer to the AISC 358-05 for more information.
All SidePlate beam-to-column joints demonstrate conformance with 10.2a as indicated in 10.2b per ICCES ESR-1275

RAM Structural System

129

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

10.4a [E2.5a] Beam and Column Limitations

Refer to the requirements of 8.2a Only AISC 360 B4.1 limits are required to be met.

358-05 5.3.1 [358-10 5.3.1] Beam Limitations

If AISC358-05 Section 5.3.1 RBS Moment Connections are designated in the Codes dialog box then all the
additional Beam Limitation requirements of this section, beyond those of 341-05, will be performed. For
5.3.1(2) the beam depth will be used to assess if the section size exceeds the largest W36 section depth.
It may be possible however that a beam with greater depth is appropriate (or shallower depth
inappropriate) if they are not pre-qualified.

358-05 5.3.2 [358-10 5.3.2] Column Limitations

If AISC358-05 Section 5.3.2 RBS Moment Connections are designated in the Codes dialog box then all the
additional Column Limitation requirements of this section, beyond those of 341-05, will be performed.

10.5 [E2.6f] Continuity Plates

If AISC358-05 RBS Connections are designated by the engineer in the Codes dialog then the 358-05 2.4.4
requirements will be performed. In this check the program will assess the column dimensions and
indicate when stiffeners are required to be provided.

10.8 [E2.4a] Lateral Bracing of Beams

Pertinent detailing information regarding stiffness and spacing of lateral bracing required of beams is
provided.
Beams framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace both the top and bottom flange of
the girder.
Joists framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace only the top flange of the girder.
If required the engineer can assign user brace points to all lateral beams to meet this provision. The user
brace points should represent actual physical bracing to be provided on the constructed beam.

11.[E1] Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)

11.2 [E1.6b] Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
When calculating the required shear strength per Section 9.2a (by reference from Section 10.2) all
standard provision load combinations with seismic load cases are considered, replacing the seismic load
case and factor with the force produced from a term 1.0E where E = 2.0 [1.1 Ry Mpr] / L. The 1.0 load
factor will replace the load factor associated with the seismic load case in the underlying load
combination. Lis taken as the distance between reduced beam sections, if they exist, otherwise L is the
distance between the face of the columns supporting the beams. Mpr is the ultimate strength of the
beam in bending at the reduced beam section, if it exists, otherwise it is from the full beam section. All
SidePlate beam-to-column joints demonstrate conformance with 11.2

11.5 [E1.6b] Continuity Plates

The engineer should provide continuity plates in accordance with Section 11.5 of equal or greater
dimension than the supported beam flanges. Refer to the code for detailing information regarding the
strength of the welded joints.

RAM Structural System

130

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

12.[E4] Special Truss Moment Frames (STMF)

STMFs are not designed or checked within the program.

[E5]. Ordinary Cantilever Column Systems (OCCS) - ANSI 341-10 ASD and LRFD
OCCS's are designed and checked within the program.

[E6]. Special Cantilever Column Systems (SCCS) - ANSI 341-10 ASD and LRFD
SCCS's are designed and checked within the program.

13.[F2] Special Concentric Braced Frames (SCBF)

13.2 [F2.5] Bracing Members Lateral Force Distribution
The unbraced length of a brace is considered to be the length between the nodes at the brace ends.
To perform the lateral force distribution checks on SCBFs, the engineer is required to assign the same
frame number to all the braces in the same line of bracing. Also, the Use Frame Nos. to Designate a
Frame Line option must be selected in the Seismic Code Dialog obtained by selecting the CriteriaCodes command.
The b/t ratios of stiffened and un-stiffened elements are checked per 8.2b against the compactness
requirements in AISC 360 specification Table B4.1 and the requirements of 8.2 (Table I-8-1). Angles are
only checked for the requirements of Table I-8-1.

AISC 341-10 Analysis of SCBF Columns

Member code check of SCBF columns follow the requirements of Section F2.3(i) where braces are
assumed to resist forces corresponding to their expected strength in compression and tension and the
requirements of Section F2.3(ii), in which braces in tension resist forces corresponding to their
expected strength and braces in compression are assumed to resist their expected post-buckling
strength.

Figure 8:
To determine Emh for SCBF Column O, the effect of braces in frame lines A-O-B and X-O-Y are
independently determined according to Section F2.3(i) and F2.3(ii). Frame lines A-O-B and X-O-Y are
assumed to frame into the major and minor axes respectively of Column O. The tensile and compressive

RAM Structural System

131

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
Emh values determined from the analyses are used in the load combinations for the applicable building
code.
Limitation: The analysis performed according to Section F2.3(i) and F2.3(ii) does not consider the
interactive effect of axial loads on the column from braces in the two framing lines. The results from
corner columns or columns with framing lines into the major and minor axes should be verified by the
engineer.

14.[F1] Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)

14.2 Bracing Members
To facilitate connection design the brace strength values are reported.
All brace frames are not allowed to have braces with Kl/r larger than 4.0 Es / F y

15.[F3] Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)

The following frame configurations are considered valid EBF frames by the RAM Structural System.

Note: If any other lateral member (beam or column or brace) is supported by a link in any of the above
configurations, the frame will not be considered a valid EBF frame.

15.2 [F3.5b] Links

15.2a The maximum axial force in the link is taken as the maximum axial load from all the standard
provision load combinations.
15.2fb The axial force (Pu (LRFD), Pa (ASD)) in the link is the same as that calculated for 15.2e.
15.2c The link rotation angle is taken as the largest calculated link rotation from all seismic load
cases. The program uses the approximate link rotation angle calculation described in the commentary.
The formulae provided in the commentary are modified as follows to account for unsymmetrical
geometry. Note that the frame displacement (Delta) is calculated as the net difference in horizontal
displacement of the column top node relative to the column bottom node, projected into the plane of the
original frame. The story ht (h) is calculated as the node to node distance from the beam-column joint

RAM Structural System

132

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
down the column to the next braced level. The link length (e) is the clear length (from face of column if
at a support).
EBF beams are required to span between two steel, lateral columns.

h
p
L

is calculated from the end furthest away from the link.

p = h
=

p(L e)
e

Figure 9: Configuration 1

h
p1

p2
L

RAM Structural System

133

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

1 = p1 +

p2b + p1a
e

2 = p2 +

p2b + p1a
e

Figure 10: Configuration 2

1
e1

e2

2
2

h
p1

p2
L

1 =
2 =

( p1 + p2) (e1 + a)
2

e1

( p1 + p2) (e2 + b)
2

e2

Figure 11: Configuration 3

The calculated angle is then multiplied by the Cd value provided by the engineer in the Codes dialog box,
to produce the plastic link rotation angle. This magnified rotation angle is then compared to the code
prescribed limits.
The calculated plastic link rotation angle in conservatively not reduced by the elastic link rotation angle.
For the central EBF configuration, where two different rotation angles are calculated, the larger angle is
reported.
Note: No additional consideration is given to the calculations for sloped beams, that is, the link
displacement is assumed to be perpendicular to the link. Also, no consideration is given for rigid body
translation and rotation that may exist in an EBF frame in the upper stories of a tall structure.

15.3 [F3.5b(4)] Link Stiffeners

Link Stiffeners are detailed in the output with a schematic diagram (not-to-scale) similar to that shown
inf the following figure. In the output the table below the schematic provides details on the stiffener
numbers and dimensions. The table contains the following columns.

RAM Structural System

134

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
Link

link number on the beam (1 or 2)

the length of the link

number of equal spaces for the intermediate stiffeners

spacing of the first stiffener

WxT End

width and thickness of the end stiffeners

WxT Int

width and thickness of the intermediate stiffeners

Int. Stiff Sides the number of sides of the beam web that the intermediate stiffeners are required on

e
# Equal Spc

LxWxT Int.
(see table)
LxWxT End
(both sides)

15.4 [F3.6c] Link-To-Column Connections

15.4a Link-to-column connection design should be based on test results and are not designed in RAM
Frame.
15.4b If the beam-to-column connection is reinforced so as to preclude yielding over a length of the
link the engineer is responsible for determining the applicability of the RAM Frame results. This
situation is not currently considered in the EBF design performed by RAM Frame.

15.6 [F3.6e] Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link

The design of Eccentric Braced Frames are sensitive to the geometric configuration of the braces (and
link length). In particular the ability to get the beam outside the link to meet code specification may
require a change in the geometry of the brace rather than an increase or decrease in beam size. The
engineer is referred to the AISC website for references (Steel Tips) regarding efficient EBF brace
configurations.
15.6a To perform the diagonal brace capacity provision the link beam at the top of the brace is
located and the link capacity (1.25 Ry Vn) is calculated. The analyzed load case that produces the largest
shear in the identified link is also determined. The brace is then designed for a load combination that
consists of a single term (load factor x load case). The combination factor is taken as the ratio of the link
capacity to the maximum link shear force. The load case in the combination is that which produced the

RAM Structural System

135

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
maximum link shear force. This load combination should thus produce the desired shear force (equal in
magnitude to the link capacity) in the link. For example, if a link capacity is 100 kip, and the maximum
shear in the link is 40 kip from load case E1, then the generated load combination is 100/40 E1 = 2.5 E1
(both positive and negative combinations are considered). All the above-mentioned parameters are
shown on the report.
Note: These calculated load factors could be fairly large in magnitude if the beam used for the link is
overly conservatively sized or if the geometry of the braces is such that the link experiences more of a
bending rather than a shear failure.
15.6b The design of the beam outside the link is performed in a similar fashion to 15.6a. That is, the
link(s) on a beam are identified and load combinations are generated based on the ratio of the link shear
to link capacities. For each link on a beam there are two load combinations created (as described in
15.6a). These combinations are then used to determine if the beam (outside of the link) is adequate to
resist the forces that would ensure link yielding before beam failure. Note: The code stipulates that the
beam capacity (outside of the link) can be increased by Ry. In RAM Frame the program implements this
provision by reducing the demand (load factor in the combination) by Ry. All the above mentioned
parameters are shown on the report.
15.6d The brace connection forces are taken as the maximum forces at the top of the brace, generated
by the load combination(s) created according to 15.6a.
The design of a column according to load combinations A4 and A5 is not performed as part of the
seismic provisions, but rather as a part of the code check performed in standard provision mode. In
seismic mode RAM Frame identifies all beams that frame into an EBF column and determines if they are
EBF beams. If so, the links are identified and, similar to 15.6a, load combinations are generated that
would result in the appropriate force being generated in the links and the column in consideration. In
the event that there are non-EBF beams supported on the column the user will be given a warning. The
warning is to let the user consider the fact that there may be a loading condition that would result in the
non-EBF frame beam causing controlling loads on the column, prior to the EBF link beams yielding. This
is most likely to be a consideration when the non-EBF beam frames into the column perpendicular to
the EBF beams.

16.[F4] Buckling Restrained Braced Frame (BRBF)

16.2 [F4.5] Bracing Members
16.2a. Steel Core The brace design axial strength, Pysc (LRFD), and the brace allowable axial
strength, Pysc / (ASD), in tension and compression, according to the limit state of yielding, are
determined as follows:
Pysc = Fysc Asc
= 0.90 (LRFD)
= 1.67 (ASD)
Fysc is the Fymin value specified by the user when assigning the brace.
Asc is the area of steel core of the size assigned by the user.
16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength The adjusted brace strength in compression and tension are
calculated as RyPysc and RyPysc respectively; where Ry is taken as 1.0.

RAM Structural System

136

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

AISC 341-10 Analysis of BRBF Columns

Member code check of BRBF columns follow the requirements of Section F4.3 where braces are
assumed to resist forces corresponding to their expected strength in compression or tension.

Figure 12:
To determine Emh for BRBF Column O, the effect of braces in frame lines A-O-B and X-O-Y are
independently determined according to Section F4.3. Frame lines A-O-B and X-O-Y are assumed to
frame into the major and minor axes respectively of Column O. The tensile and compressive Emh values
determined from the analysis are used in the load combinations for the applicable building code.
Limitation: The analysis performed does not consider the interactive effect of axial loads on the column
from braces in the two framing lines. The results from corner columns or columns with framing lines
into the major and minor axes should be verified by the engineer.

16.3 [F4.6] Bracing Connections

16.3a. Required Strength The required strength of bracing connections in tension and compression
(including beam-to-column connections if part of the bracing system) is taken as 1.1 times the adjusted
brace strength in compression (LRFD) or 1.1/1.5 times the adjusted brace strength in compression
(ASD).

16.5 [F4.5a] Beams and Columns

16.5a The b/t ratios of stiffened and un-stiffened elements are checked per 8.2b against the
compactness requirements in AISC360-05 specification Table B4.1 and the requirements of 8.2 (Table
I-8-1). Angles are only checked for the requirements of Table I-8-1.

6.2.4 AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD

Limitations
A few individual checks are not performed. When a check is necessary and is not performed by the
program it will be indicated in the output.

RAM Structural System

137

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

3. Seismic Design Categories

The user is not required to assign a seismic category. If the engineer selects to use this code then all the
provisions are assumed to be applicable.

4. Loads, Load Combinations, and Nominal Strengths

Where standard provision load combinations are referred to (such as in Section 4.1 in regard to the
applicable building code), RAM Frame will use the current load combinations from the standard
provision mode. The engineer is responsible for ensuring that an appropriate set of loads and
combinations are defined in the standard provision mode prior to switching to special seismic mode and
performing a code check. Amplified Seismic load combinations as referenced in Section 4.1 are
generated within this mode.
The provisions of AISC 2002 are written for consistency with load combinations given in ASCE 7 (ASCE
2002) and IBC (ICC 2000). While AISC 2002 refers to the applicable building code as the source of the
load combinations they should be consistent with the codes above to be applicable to the design
provisions. Refer to the Section C4 in the commentary of the AISC 2002 specification for more
information.
Nominal strengths are based on Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings (December 27, 1999), published by the American Institute of Steel Construction in Manual of
Steel Construction - Load and Resistance Factor Design (3rd Edition).

6. Materials
6.1 Material Specification
No steel grade is specified in RAM Frame and as such the engineer is responsible for ensuring
compliance with this provision.

6.2 Material Properties for Determination of Required Strength of Connections or Related

Members
The Ry values according to Table I-6-1 have been implemented. Note that all Hollow Structural Sections
(HSS and TS) are assigned a Ry of 1.3. For other rolled sections Ry is based on the engineer specified
yield strength.

8. Members
8.2 Local Buckling
Only where specifically required by the specification and footnotes to table I-8-1 are the members
checked against the limiting width to thickness rations of Table I-8-1 and LRFD Table B5.1.
Where applicable, Pu is taken as the maximum axial tension and compression force on the member from
all the selected standard provision load combinations.
The calculation of the b/t, d/t, and h/t ratios are based on the AISC LRFD 3rd specification.
Note that for webs of beams in Special Moment Frames (SMF) there are some conflicting limits. The
program will limit the section web to the smaller of:

RAM Structural System

138

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
2.45 Es / F y
and
1.12

Es
Fy

2.33

Pu
bP y

8.3 Column Strength

This provision is applied to all columns, irrespective of frame type. The standard provision load
combinations are utilized to calculate Pu.
When Pu/Pn > 0.4 the amplified seismic load combinations generated in the seismic provision mode
(see 4. above) are used to determine the required compressive and tensile strength.
The limiting provisions of 8.3(2) are not applied which could result in conservative axial forces being
considered in 8.3(1).

8.4 Column Splices

Detailing information regarding the magnitude of the required splice force to be designed and detailed
are calculated and presented. The engineer is responsible for the design of the splice connection
components.

8.4 Column Bases

No calculations or information is provided with respect to column base design. Refer to the specification
for additional information or requirements.

9. Special Moment Frames (SMF)

9.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
Connections in Special moment frames require pre-qualification according to Section 9.2b to achieve the
performance requirements of 9.2a. The engineer is referred to commentary on 9.2b which references
FEMA350 as a source for several connections that are considered prequalified.
When calculating the shear (Vu) based on 1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S + 2Mpe/L, all combinations of 1.2D, 0.5L
and 0.2S are calculated so as to determine the maximum shear load on the beam from the gravity loads.
This is added to the contribution of 2Mpr/L. L is taken as the distance between reduced beam sections, if
they exist, otherwise L is the distance between the face of the columns supporting the beams. Mpr is the
ultimate strength of the beam in bending at the reduced beam section, if it exists, otherwise it is from
the full beam section.

9.3 Panel-Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections

Only connections parallel to the column web are considered and checked by the program.
The required shear strength of the panel-zone is determined from the summation of moments at the
column faces as determined by projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge locations (RBS if
they exist) to the column faces. The material factor v is taken as 1.0 in all cases.
Pu is taken as the maximum axial load on the column at the joint from all standard provision load
combinations.

RAM Structural System

139

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
If the beams frame into the flange of the column at some angle other than parallel to the column web,
then the component of the beam force parallel to the column web is used.
Panel Zone shear is calculated as the moment divided by the distance between the center of the beam
flanges.
Not that the requirements of 9.3b are irrespective of the magnitude of the panel shear force. The
program can consider the use of plug-welds to reduce the required web plate thickness, refer to the
Criteria - Joints menu command to select this plug weld option.

9.4 Beam and Column Limitations

Refer to the requirements of 8.2.
Per table I-8-1 footnote 3, SMF columns will be checked to comply with ps in Table I-8-1 when
Equation 9-3 is less than 2.0, else they will be checked against LRFD Table B5.1.

9.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio

The calculation of Mpb is determined by summing the projections of the expected beam flexural
strength(s).
If the beams frame into the flange of the column at some angle other than parallel to the column web,
then the component of the beam force parallel to the column web is used to calculate Mpb
If no reduced beam section is specified on a member than the capacity of the full member is utilized.
For the Exception (if necessary) the design shear strength of a story is calculated as the component of
the major axis shear strength, of all the columns in the direction of the column under consideration,
added together. All columns, not only those columns of the special moment frame type, are considered.

9.7 Beam-To-Column Connection Restraint

A column will be assumed to remain elastic only if the ratio from Equation 9-3 is greater than 2.0.
A joint is considered restrained if contained within a deck, is a beam frames into the weak axis of the
column, or by the user specifying that the column is braced.
If the user indicates that the minor axis of the joint column is unbraced then the physical bracing (deck
or beams) is ignored and the joint is considered unrestrained.
The deck is only considered to brace the joint at the elevation of the top flange of the beams framing into
the flanges of the column.
If a beam (not a joist) is determined to frame into the minor axis of the column at the joint, then RAM
Frame assumes that the joint is restrained at the elevation of both the top and bottom flanges of the
framing beams.

9.8 Lateral Support of Beams

Beams framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace both the top and bottom flange of
the girder.
Joists framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace only the top flange of the girder.
If required the engineer can assign user brace points to all lateral beams to meet this provision. The user
brace points should represent actual physical bracing to be provided on the constructed beam.

RAM Structural System

140

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

10. Intermediate Moment Frames (IMF)

10.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
The required shear strength of the connection (Vu) is provided for the load combination 1.2D + 0.5L +
0.2S + 2.0 x (1.1 Ry Fy Z) / L. The maximum shear from the amplified seismic load combinations is also
provided.
IMF connections are required to be prequalified, refer to the commentary in AISC 2002 for more
information.

11. Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)

11.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
The required shear strength of the connection (Vu) is provided for the load combination 1.2D + 0.5L +
0.2S + 2.0 x (1.1 Ry Fy Z) / L.

11.5 Continuity Plates

The engineer should provide continuity plates in accordance with Section 11.5 of equal or greater
dimension than the supported beam flanges. Refer to the code for detailing information regarding the
strength of the welded joints.

12. Special Truss Moment Frames (STMF)

STMFs are not designed or checked within the program.

13. Special Concentric Braced Frames (SCBF)

13.2 Bracing Members
The unbraced length of a brace is considered to be the length between the nodes at the brace ends.
To perform the lateral force distribution checks on SCBFs, the engineer is required to assign the same
frame number to all the braces in the same line of bracing. Also, the Use Frame Nos. to Designate a
Frame Line option must be selected in the Seismic Code dialog, which is opened by selecting the
Criteria > Codes command.
The b/t ratios of stiffened and unstiffened elements are checked against the compactness requirements
in LRFD specification Table B5.1 and the requirements of 8.2 (Table I-8-1). Angles are only checked for
the requirements of Table I-8-1.

14. Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)

14.2 Strength
The required strength of members is based on load combinations generated in the seismic provision
mode (including the amplified seismic loads).

RAM Structural System

141

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
To facilitate connection design the brace strength (Ry Fy Ag) is reported.
Chevron (V or inverted V) brace frames are not allowed to have braces with Kl/r larger than
4.23 Es / F y .

15. Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)

The following frame configurations are considered valid EBF frames by the RAM Structural System.

Note: If any other lateral member (beam or column or brace) is supported by a link in any of the above
configurations, the frame will not be considered a valid EBF frame.

15.2 Links
The maximum axial force in the link is taken as the maximum axial load from all the standard provision
load combinations.
The link rotation angle is taken as the largest calculated link rotation from all seismic load cases. The
program uses the approximate link rotation angle calculation described in the commentary. The
formulae provided in the commentary are modified as follows to account for unsymmetrical geometry.
Note that the frame displacement (Delta) is calculated as the net difference in horizontal displacement
of the column top node relative to the column bottom node, projected into the plane of the original
frame. The story ht (h) is calculated as the node to node distance from the beam-column joint down the
column to the next braced level. The link length (e) is the clear length (from face of column if at a
support).
EBF beams are required to span between two steel, lateral columns.

RAM Structural System

142

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

h
p
L

is calculated from the end furthest away from the link.

p = h
=

p(L e)
e

Figure 13: Configuration 1

2
1

h
p1

p2
L

1 = p1 +

RAM Structural System

143

p2b + p1a
e

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

2 = p2 +

p2b + p1a
e

Figure 14: Configuration 2

1
e1

e2

2
2

h
p1

p2
L

1 =
2 =

( p1 + p2) (e1 + a)
2

e1

( p1 + p2) (e2 + b)
2

e2

Figure 15: Configuration 3

The calculated angle is then multiplied by the Cd value provided by the engineer in the Codes dialog box,
to produce the plastic link rotation angle. This magnified rotation angle is then compared to the code
prescribed limits.
The calculated plastic link rotation angle in conservatively not reduced by the elastic link rotation angle.
For the central EBF configuration, where two different rotation angles are calculated, the larger angle is
reported.
Note that no additional consideration is given to the calculations for sloped beams, that is, the link
displacement is assumed to be perpendicular to the link. Also, no consideration is given for rigid body
translation and rotation that may exist in an EBF frame in the upper stories of a tall structure.

15.3 Link Stiffeners

Link Stiffeners are detailed in the output with a schematic diagram (not-to-scale) similar to that shown
inf the following figure. In the output the table below the schematic provides details on the stiffener
numbers and dimensions. The table contains the following columns.
Link

link number on the beam (1 or 2)

the length of the link

RAM Structural System

144

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
#

number of equal spaces for the intermediate stiffeners

spacing of the first stiffener

WxT End

width and thickness of the end stiffeners

WxT Int

width and thickness of the intermediate stiffeners

Int. Stiff Sides the number of sides of the beam web that the intermediate stiffeners are required on

e
# Equal Spc

LxWxT Int.
(see table)
LxWxT End
(both sides)

15.4 Link-To-Column Connections

15.4a Link-to-column connection design should be based on test results and are not designed in RAM
Frame.
15.4b If the beam-to-column connection is reinforced so as to preclude yielding over a length of the
link the engineer is responsible for determining the applicability of the RAM Frame results. This
situation is not currently considered in the EBF design performed by RAM Frame.

15.6 Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link

The design of Eccentric Braced Frames are sensitive to the geometric configuration of the braces (and
link length). In particular the ability to get the beam outside the link to meet code specification may
require a change in the geometry of the brace rather than an increase or decrease in beam size. The
engineer is referred to the AISC website for references (Steel Tips) regarding efficient EBF brace
configurations.
15.6a To perform the diagonal brace capacity provision the link beam at the top of the brace is
located and the link capacity (1.25Ry Vn) is calculated. The analyzed load case that produces the largest
shear in the identified link is also determined. The brace is then designed for a load combination that
consists of a single term (load factor x load case). The combination factor is taken as the ratio of the link
capacity to the maximum link shear force. The load case in the combination is that which produced the
maximum link shear force. This load combination should thus produce the desired shear force (equal in
magnitude to the link capacity) in the link. For example, if a link capacity is 100 kip, and the maximum
shear in the link is 40 kip from load case S1, then the generated load combination is 100/40 S1 = 2.5 S1

RAM Structural System

145

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
(both positive and negative combinations are considered). All the above-mentioned parameters are
shown on the report.
15.6b The design of the beam outside the link is performed in a similar fashion to 15.6a. That is, the
link(s) on a beam are identified and load combinations are generated based on the ratio of the link shear
to link capacities. For each link on a beam there are two load combinations created (as described in
15.6a). These combinations are then used to determine if the beam (outside of the link) is adequate to
resist the forces that would ensure link yielding before beam failure. Note: The code stipulates that the
beam capacity (outside of the link) can be increased by Ry. In RAM Frame the program implements this
provision by reducing the demand (load factor in the combination) by Ry. All the above mentioned
parameters are shown on the report.
15.6d The brace connection forces are taken as the maximum forces at the top of the brace, generated
by the load combination(s) created according to 15.6a.
The design of a column according to load combinations A4 and A5 is not performed as part of the
seismic provisions, but rather as a part of the code check performed in standard provision mode. In
seismic mode RAM Frame identifies all beams that frame into an EBF column and determines if they are
EBF beams. If so, the links are identified and, similar to 15.6a, load combinations are generated that
would result in the appropriate force being generated in the links and the column in consideration. In
the event that there are non-EBF beams supported on the column the user will be given a warning. The
warning is to let the user consider the fact that there may be a loading condition that would result in the
non-EBF frame beam causing controlling loads on the column, prior to the EBF link beams yielding. This
is most likely to be a consideration when the non-EBF beam frames into the column perpendicular to
the EBF beams.

6.2.5 AISC 1997 LRFD

Limitations
A few individual checks are not performed. When a check is necessary and is not performed by the
program it will be indicated in the output.

3. Seismic Design Categories

The user is not required to assign a seismic category. If the engineer selects to use this code then all the
provisions are assumed to be applicable.

4. Loads, Load Combinations, and Nominal Strengths

Where standard provision load combinations are referred to (such as in Section 4.1 in regard to the
applicable building code), RAM Frame will use the current load combinations from the standard
provision mode. The engineer is responsible for ensuring that an appropriate set of loads and
combinations are defined in the standard provision mode prior to switching to special seismic mode and
performing a code check. Amplified Seismic load combinations as referenced in Section 4.1 are
generated within this mode.
The provisions of AISC 2002 are written for consistency with load combinations given in ASCE 7 (ASCE
2002) and IBC (ICC 2000). While AISC 2002 refers to the applicable building code as the source of the
load combinations they should be consistent with the codes above to be applicable to the design

RAM Structural System

146

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
provisions. Refer to the Section C4 in the commentary of the AISC 2002 specification for more
information.
Nominal strengths are based on Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings (December 27, 1999), published by the American Institute of Steel Construction in Manual of
Steel Construction - Load and Resistance Factor Design (3rd Edition).

6. Materials
6.1 Material Specification
No steel grade is specified in RAM Frame and as such the engineer is responsible for ensuring
compliance with this provision.

6.2 Material Properties for Determination of Required Strength of Connections or Related

Members
The Ry values according to Table I-6-1 have been implemented. Note that all Hollow Structural Sections
(HSS and TS) are assigned a Ry of 1.3. For other rolled sections Ry is based on the engineer specified
yield strength.

8.Columns
All columns, of all frame types, are subject to the requirements of this section.
Pu is taken as the maximum axial tension and compression force on the column from all the selected
standard provision load combinations.

9. Special Moment Frames (SMF)

9.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
Refer to the specification for information regarding testing procedures for special moment resisting
frame connections. Note that at the time of this printing the web site
http://quiver.eerc.berkeley.edu:8080/design/conndbase/index.html contains a database of all the
tested connections.
When calculating the shear (Vu) based on 1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S + 2Mpe/L, all combinations of 1.2D, 0.5L,
and 0.2S are calculated so as to determine the maximum shear load on the beam from the gravity loads.
This is added to the contribution of 2Mpr/L. L is taken as the distance between reduced beam sections, if
they exist, otherwise L is the distance between the face of the columns supporting the beams. Mpr is the
ultimate strength of the beam in bending at the reduced beam section, if it exists, otherwise it is from
the full beam section.

9.3 Panel-Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections

Per supplement no 2, the required shear strength of the panel-zone is determined from the summation
of moments at the column faces as determined by projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge
locations to the column faces. Also the material factor v is taken as 1.0 in all cases.
Pu is taken as the maximum axial load on the column at the joint from all standard provision load
combinations.

RAM Structural System

147

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
If the beams frame into the flange of the column at some angle other than parallel to the column web,
then the component of the beam force parallel to the column web is used.
Panel Zone shear is calculated as the moment divided by the distance between the center of the beam
flanges.

9.4 Beam and Column Limitations

The Pu used to calculate the limiting width-to-thickness ratio is taken as the maximum axial
compressive force from all standard provision load combinations.
The calculation of the b/t, d/t and h/t ratios are based on the AISC LRFD 3rd specification.
Per supplement no. 2, columns will be checked to comply with p in Table I-9-1 when Equation 9-3 is
less than 2.0, else they will be checked against LRFD Table B5.1.

9.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio

Per supplement No. 2, The calculation of Mpb is determined by summing the projections of the
expected beam flexural strength(s).
If the beams frame into the flange of the column at some angle other than parallel to the column web,
then the component of the beam force parallel to the column web is used to calculate Mpb
If no reduced beam section is specified on a member than the capacity of the full member is utilized.
To calculate the design shear strength of a story, the component of the major axis shear strength, of all
the columns in the direction of the column under consideration, is added together. All columns, not only
those columns of the special moment frame type, are considered.

9.7 Beam-To-Column Connection Restraint

Per supplement No. 2, a column will be assumed to remain elastic only if the ratio from Equation 9-3 is
greater than 2.0.
A joint is considered restrained if contained within a deck, is a beam frames into the weak axis of the
column, or by the user specifying that the column is braced.
If the user indicates that the minor axis of the joint column is unbraced then the physical bracing (deck
or beams) is ignored and the joint is considered unrestrained.
The deck is only considered to brace the joint at the elevation of the top flange of the beams framing into
the flanges of the column.
If a beam is determined to frame into the minor axis of the column at the joint, then RAM Frame
assumes that the joint is restrained at the elevation of both the top and bottom flanges of the framing
beams.

9.8 Lateral Support of Beams

Beams framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace both the top and bottom flange of
the girder.
Joists framing into the side of a lateral girder are assumed to brace only the top flange of the girder.
If required the engineer can assign user brace points to all lateral beams to meet this provision. The user
brace points should represent actual physical bracing to be provided on the constructed beam.

RAM Structural System

148

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

10. Intermediate Moment Frames (IMF)

Per Supplement 2, Intermediate moment frames no longer need comply with modified SMF
requirements. The following information is provided to facilitate design of IMF structures.

10.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections

The required shear strength of the connection (Vu) is provided for the load combination 1.2D + 0.5L +
0.2S + 2.0 x (1.1 Ry Fy Z) / L. The maximum shear from load combination 4-1 is also provided.

11. Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)

11.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
The required shear strength of the connection (Vu) is provided for the load combination 1.2D + 0.5L +
0.2S + 2.0 x (1.1 Ry Fy Z) / L.

11.3 Continuity Plates

The engineer should provide continuity plates equal in dimension to the supported beam flanges unless
tests prove they are not required per AISC Supplement No. 2.

13. Special Concentric Braced Frames (SCBF)

13.2 Bracing Members
The unbraced length of a brace is considered to be the length between the nodes at the brace ends.
To perform the lateral force distribution checks on SCBFs, the engineer is required to assign the same
frame number to all the braces in the same line of bracing. Also, the Use Frame Nos. to Designate a
Frame Line option must be selected in the Seismic Code Dialog obtained by selecting the CriteriaCodes command.

13.2d Width-Thickness Ratios

Per Supplement No. 2 the b/t ratios of stiffened and unstiffened elements are checked against the
compactness requirements in LRFD specification Table B5.1. Also, b/t of angles are not allowed to
exceed 52/fy, I-Shaped members and channels will be checked with p in Table I-9-1.

14. Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)

Per supplement no 2, Requirements of AISC 1997 Section 14.2 14.5 have been replaced with the
following:

14.2 Strength
The required strength of members is based on load combinations 4-1 and 4-2.
To facilitate connection design the brace strength (Ry Fy Ag) is reported.
Chevron (V or inverted V) brace frames are not allowed to have braces with Kl/r larger than 720/Fy.

RAM Structural System

149

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

15. Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)

The following frame configurations are considered valid EBF frames by the RAM Structural System.

Note: If any other lateral member (beam or column or brace) is supported by a link in any of the above
configurations, the frame will not be considered a valid EBF frame.

15.2 Links
15.2e The maximum axial force in the link is taken as the maximum axial load from all the standard
provision load combinations.
15.2f The axial force (Pu) in the link is the same as that calculated for 15.2e.
15.2g The link rotation angle is taken as the largest calculated link rotation from all seismic load
cases. The program uses the approximate link rotation angle calculation described in the commentary.
The formulae provided in the commentary are modified as follows to account for unsymmetrical
geometry. Note that the frame displacement (Delta) is calculated as the net difference in horizontal
displacement of the column top node relative to the column bottom node, projected into the plane of the
original frame. The story ht (h) is calculated as the node to node distance from the beam-column joint
down the column to the next braced level. The link length (e) is the clear length (from face of column if
at a support).
EBF beams are required to span between two steel, lateral columns.

RAM Structural System

150

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

h
p
L

is calculated from the end furthest away from the link.

p = h
=

p(L e)
e

Figure 16: Configuration 1

2
1

h
p1

p2
L

1 = p1 +

RAM Structural System

151

p2b + p1a
e

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

2 = p2 +

p2b + p1a
e

Figure 17: Configuration 2

1
e1

e2

2
2

h
p1

p2
L

1 =
2 =

( p1 + p2) (e1 + a)
2

e1

( p1 + p2) (e2 + b)
2

e2

Figure 18: Configuration 3

The calculated angle is then multiplied by the Cd value provided by the engineer in the Codes dialog box,
to produce the plastic link rotation angle. This magnified rotation angle is then compared to the code
prescribed limits.
The calculated plastic link rotation angle in conservatively not reduced by the elastic link rotation angle.
For the central EBF configuration, where two different rotation angles are calculated, the larger angle is
reported.
Note: No additional consideration is given to the calculations for sloped beams, that is, the link
displacement is assumed to be perpendicular to the link. Also, no consideration is given for rigid body
translation and rotation that may exist in an EBF frame in the upper stories of a tall structure.

15.3 Link Stiffeners

Link Stiffeners are detailed in the output with a schematic diagram (not-to-scale) similar to that shown
inf the following figure. In the output the table below the schematic provides details on the stiffener
numbers and dimensions. The table contains the following columns.
Link

link number on the beam (1 or 2)

the length of the link

RAM Structural System

152

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
#

number of equal spaces for the intermediate stiffeners

spacing of the first stiffener

WxT End

width and thickness of the end stiffeners

WxT Int

width and thickness of the intermediate stiffeners

Int. Stiff Sides the number of sides of the beam web that the intermediate stiffeners are required on

e
# Equal Spc

LxWxT Int.
(see table)
LxWxT End
(both sides)

15.4 Link-To-Column Connections

15.4a Link-to-column connection design should be based on test results and are not designed in RAM
Frame.
15.4b If the beam-to-column connection is reinforced so as to preclude yielding over a length of the
link the engineer is responsible for determining the applicability of the RAM Frame results. This
situation is not currently considered in the EBF design performed by RAM Frame.

15.6 Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link

The design of Eccentric Braced Frames are sensitive to the geometric configuration of the braces (and
link length). In particular the ability to get the beam outside the link to meet code specification may
require a change in the geometry of the brace rather than an increase or decrease in beam size. The
engineer is referred to the AISC website for references (Steel Tips) regarding efficient EBF brace
configurations.
15.6a To perform the diagonal brace capacity provision the link beam at the top of the brace is
located and the link capacity (1.25 Ry Vn) is calculated. The analyzed load case that produces the largest
shear in the identified link is also determined. The brace is then designed for a load combination that
consists of a single term (load factor x load case). The combination factor is taken as the ratio of the link
capacity to the maximum link shear force. The load case in the combination is that which produced the
maximum link shear force. This load combination should thus produce the desired shear force (equal in
magnitude to the link capacity) in the link. For example, if a link capacity is 100 kip, and the maximum
shear in the link is 40 kip from load case S1, then the generated load combination is 100/40 S1 = 2.5 S1

RAM Structural System

153

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
(both positive and negative combinations are considered). All the above-mentioned parameters are
shown on the report.
15.6b The design of the beam outside the link is performed in a similar fashion to 15.6a. That is, the
link(s) on a beam are identified and load combinations are generated based on the ratio of the link shear
to link capacities. For each link on a beam there are two load combinations created (as described in
14.6a). These combinations are then used to determine if the beam (outside of the link) is adequate to
resist the forces that would ensure link yielding before beam failure. Note: The code stipulates that the
beam capacity (outside of the link) can be increased by Ry. In RAM Frame the program implements this
provision by reducing the demand (load factor in the combination) by Ry. All the above mentioned
parameters are shown on the report.
15.6d The brace connection forces are taken as the maximum forces at the top of the brace, generated
by the load combination(s) created according to
15.6a. The design of a column according to load combinations A4 and A5 is not performed as part of
the seismic provisions, but rather as a part of the code check performed in standard provision mode. In
seismic mode RAM Frame identifies all beams that frame into an EBF column and determines if they are
EBF beams. If so, the links are identified and, similar to 15.6a, load combinations are generated that
would result in the appropriate force being generated in the links and the column in consideration. In
the event that there are non-EBF beams supported on the column the user will be given a warning. The
warning is to let the user consider the fact that there may be a loading condition that would result in the
non-EBF frame beam causing controlling loads on the column, prior to the EBF link beams yielding. This
is most likely to be a consideration when the non-EBF beam frames into the column perpendicular to
the EBF beams.

FEMA 350
The requirements of FEMA 350 are based substantially on those of the AISC 1997 Seismic Provisions for
Structural Steel Buildings. The engineer has the option of performing the FEMA 350 provision checks for
all the seismic provision codes (UBC and AISC). The FEMA 350 provisions are only applicable to Steel
Moment Frame structures as indicated in this section. The FEMA 350 provisions take the place or are in
addition to some of the requirements of the selected seismic provision code. In all detailed output both
the current code section, and the FEMA 350 section that replaces it, are displayed. Note that the June 18,
2001 errata have been incorporated where required.

2.9 Frame Design

2.9.1 Strength of Beams and Columns
Strong Column-Weak Beam should satisfy Equation 9-3 of the AISC 1997, Except that M*pb is based on
the requirements of Section 3.2.6 in FEMA 350. Note that Cpr is always taken equal to 1.2 for this check.

2.9.2 Lateral Bracing of Column Flanges

Lateral bracing of column flanges should be provided whenever the following equation is not satisfied:
M * pc
Mc

2.0

where
M*pc
Mc

RAM Structural System

=
=

per Section 9.6 of AISC 1997

as indicated in Section 3.2.6 of the FEMA 350 Requirements

154

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

2.9.3 Panel Zone Strength

The panel zone check is per Section 3.3.3.2 of FEMA 350. In that section the thickness of the panel zone
required is determined from the following equation:

t=

h db
h
(0.9)0.6F yc R yc dc (db t fb)
C yM c

In RAM Frame this equation is represented by the capacity and the demand side as follows:

()

0.9 0.6F yc R yc dc t =

h db
h
db t fb

C yM c

This allows us to determine the panel zone demand from the beams at both sides of the column and
design an appropriate web plate to carry the demand. Refer the FEMA 350 for an explanation of the
parameters shown above. Note that Cpr is always taken equal to 1.2 for this check.

2.9.4 Section Compactness Requirements

Beams should conform to the requirements of AISC Seismic Provisions. Per FEMA 350 Section 3.3.1.1 in
the case of a beam with a reduced beam section the program considers the bf/2tf to occur at the ends of
the center two-thirds of the reduced beam section (RBS). For this reason the engineer is required to
input three dimensions to define the RBS, the distance face-of-column to start of RBS (a), the length of
RBS (b), and the cut of the flange each side of beam (c). Refer to the v7.0 manual for more details on
assigning reduced beam sections to members in the model.
For columns FEMA 350 stipulates that they should be compact unless a non-linear analysis shows that
they do not yield. All of the building codes already require that the column is compact and as such no
additional FEMA 350 compactness checks are performed for columns.

2.9.5 Beam Lateral Bracing

Similar to AISC 1997 the unbraced length between supports of the beam flanges is not permitted to
exceed 2500 ry/Fy.

3.5.5 Reduced Beam Section Connections

Several items of the data required for the design procedure of the pre-qualified Reduced Beam Section
Connections (FEMA 350 Section 3.5.5) are reported. In the joint output for moment frames with reduced
beam sections the Mf (using Cpr = 1.15), Vg and Vf values are all printed. Note that for sloped beams Vg
is reported perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam but Vf is always given in the vertical
(along column flange) direction. The ratio of Mf /RyZbFy is reported and a value greater than 1.0 is
considered unacceptable. All the parameters mentioned here are defined in section 3.5.5 of FEMA 350.

6.2.6 UBC97 ASD

Limitations
The eccentric brace frame type is not implemented (it is for AISC 1997).

RAM Structural System

155

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
A few individual checks are not performed. When a check is necessary and is not performed by the
program it will be indicated to the engineer.
In most of the automatically calculated load combinations in RAM Frame the standard provision mode
load factors are reduced by one-third for load combinations with seismic load. Several checks in the
special seismic provisions require that the stress of columns be determined based on standard load
combinations. Where the seismic load combinations are considered the member stress will be smaller
than required based on the third decrease in the load factors. It is suggested that in RAM Frame all
standard provision load combinations with lateral load be copied and pasted as custom load
combinations. The load factors of these combinations should be changed to 1.0 from 0.75 for all the load
cases. These load combinations should only be selected prior to proceeding into the special provision
mode. Note that if the UBC 1997 ASD automatic load generator is used in the standard provision mode
then the seismic load combinations are not reduced by one-third. As such the load factor modifications
described above do not need to be performed.

2213 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings in Seismic Zone 3 and 4
The seismic zone is selected in the code dialog displayed by selecting the Criteria-Codes command. The
seismic provisions performed are dependent on the selected zone as specified in the UBC 1997 ASD
specification.

2213.4 Materials
2213.4.2 Member Strength
Member strengths are as specified in Section 2213.4.2.
where
=
Ms
Zfy
=
Vs
0.55Fydt
=
Psc
1.7FaA
=
Pst
FyA

2213.5 Column Requirements

Where standard provision load combinations are referred to (such as in exception 2 of Section
2213.5.1), RAM Frame will use the current load combinations from the standard provision mode. The
engineer is responsible for ensuring that an appropriate set of loads and combinations are defined in
the standard provision mode prior to switching to special seismic mode and performing a code check.
Load Combinations 1.0DL + 0.7LL oE and 0.85DL oE are generated within this mode.

2213.6 Ordinary Moment Frame (OMF)

Detailing information is only provided for fully restrained joints
Per section 2213.7.1 the plastic bending moment of each beam (Mp), and where appropriate the
moment resulting from the panel zone shear strength (Mpz) are reported. Mpz is calculated
independently for each beam as Vn (panel zone strength) x Beam Depth (distance between center of
flanges). The Mpz reported is the component of the panel zone moment in the direction that the beam
frames into the column flange (less than the full panel-zone moment if the beam is not parallel to the
column web). If no panel zone value can be calculated or the beam frames into the column web then no
value is shown for Mpz in the output.

RAM Structural System

156

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
When calculating the panel zone check (from the reference to Section 2213.7.1.1 (2)) the capacity is
calculated for the column web without any doubler. This is because the panel zone check of 2213.7.2.1 is
not required for ordinary moment frames.

2213.7 Special Moment Frame (SMF)

Refer to previous section for discussion of section 2213.7.1.

2213.7.2 Panel Zone

The moment strength of a member is calculated as Ms = Z x Fy, no over-strength is applied to the
beams.
Load combination 1.0D + 1.0L + 1.85E is created internally to RAM Frame to perform this check.
The shear in the column above the joint is considered when calculating the panel zone shear force using
the above generated load combination.
Panel zone strength is a function of the beam depth. Where one panel zone capacity is reported it is
based on the deepest beam framing into the column flange (which provides the smallest capacity).
When calculating the panel zone strength per (13-1) the contribution of the web plate is added to that of
the column web. The doubler capacity is calculated independent of the column web using its own yield
strength value. The depth of the web plate (doubler) is taken as the clear distance between column
flanges.

2213.7.3 Width Thickness Ratio

The axial value used to calculate the web d/tw limit for I-Sections based on Section 2251N7 is the
maximum axial load from all standard provision load combinations. As this is a plastic capacity check
the axial load used to perform this check should be the result of a factored load combination. Per AISC
9th, page 5-184, RAM Frame calculates the largest factored axial load on the member by multiplying the
standard provision load combinations force by 1.7 if there are no lateral load case, and by 1.3 if there
are lateral load cases.
The width to thickness ratio of girders is checked against the compact member limits of the AISC ASD
specification, except as modified in 2213.7.2.

2213.7.4. Continuity Plates

Stiffeners are only designed for flange bending requirement of chapter K in AISC ASD 9th Edition.
The required area of the stiffeners is calculated as the difference in the design force (Pbf) and the flange
capacity (Rn) divided by the stiffener yield strength.

2213.7.5. Strength Ratio

Mpz is calculated as the panel zone shear capacity multiplied by the deepest beam section framing into
the column flange.
When calculating the shear capacity of a story for exception 2, all lateral steel columns, not only those
columns of the special moment frame type, are considered. Only the major axis shear capacity of the
member is considered.

RAM Structural System

157

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

2213.7.7 Girder-Column Joint Restraint

2213.7.7.1 Restrained Joint A joint is considered restrained if contained within a deck, is a beam
frames into the weak axis of the column, or by the user specifying that the column is braced.
If the user indicates that the minor axis of the joint column is unbraced then the physical bracing (deck
or beams) is ignored and the joint is considered unrestrained.
The deck is only considered to brace the joint at the elevation of the top flange of the beams framing into
the flanges of the column.
If a beam is determined to frame into the minor axis of the column at the joint, then RAM Frame
assumes that the joint is restrained at the elevation of both the top and bottom flanges of the framing
beams.

2213.8.2.3. Lateral-Force Distribution

The lateral-force distribution check of Section 2213.8.2.3 is only performed if the user indicates that
frame numbers are to be used to define a line of bracing (refer to Criteria-Codes dialog).
When performing the lateral-force distribution check of Section 2213.8.2.3, RAM Frame only
accumulates loads for those braces with the same frame numbers.

2213.8.2.5. Compression Elements in Braces

The flat wall dimension per the AISC-ASD is used to calculate the width-thickness ratio for tube sections
when checking 2213.8.2.5.

2213.8.4.2 K-Type Bracing

K-Type frames are only allowed if the user indicates to apply one and two story exceptions in the
Criteria-Codes dialog.
All the members of the structure designated as type K-Frame will be required to meet the requirements
of 2213.8.5.

2213.8.5. One- and Two- Story Buildings

Section 2213.8.5 requires that the strength of all braces meet the increased strength demands. RAM
Frame only performs this check if all the braces of the frame type have pinned connections (i.e. axial
only load). This is because the specification provides no indication of how to calculate the bending
strength of a member that may fail in an elastic fashion (e.g. due to lateral torsional buckling).

6.2.7 UBC 1997 LRFD

Limitations
The eccentric brace frame type is not implemented (it is for AISC 1997)
A few individual checks are not performed. When a check is necessary and is not performed by the
program it will be indicated in the output.

RAM Structural System

158

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check
Reduced beam sections are not considered except for panel zone and strong-column weak-beam
calculations if the engineer specifies FEMA 350.

6 Column Requirements
6.1 Column Strength
The standard provision load combinations are used to calculate Pu in Section 6.1.
Where Pu/Pn exceeds 0.5 then the extreme axial loads from all the Special Seismic load combinations
are used to calculate axial load in 6.1a and 6.1b.

6.2 Column Splices

The axial force calculated for column splices per 6.2 is calculated as the maximum from both the
standard provision and the special provision load combinations.

7 Ordinary Moment Frames

7.1 Scope
No standard provision checks are performed in seismic provision mode. The engineer is responsible for
confirming that all the members are capable of resisting the standard provision load combinations, in
standard provision mode. Only the added provisions are performed in this special seismic mode.

7.2 Joint Requirements

Detailing information is only provided for fully restrained joints
Per Section 8.2 the plastic bending moment of each beam (Mp), and where appropriate the moment
resulting from the panel zone shear strength (Mpz) are reported. Mpz is calculated independently for
each beam as Vn (panel zone strength) x Beam Depth (distance between center of flanges). The Mpz
reported is the component of the panel zone moment in the direction that the beam frames into the
column flange (less than the full panel-zone moment if the beam is not parallel to the column web). If no
panel zone value can be calculated or the beam frames into the column web then no value is shown for
Mpz in the output.
The minimum of Mp (beam moment strength) and Mpz (panel zone strength at the joint under
consideration) is used to calculate the required shear strength per 8.2b (1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S + 2M/L).
Where D is the dead load, M/L is the positive live load and S is snow load if it exists. Mpz is only
considered if it has a positive magnitude.

8 Special Moment Frames

8.1 Scope
No standard provision checks are performed in seismic provision mode. The engineer is responsible for
confirming that all the members are capable of resisting the standard provision load combinations, in
standard provision mode. Only the added provisions are performed in this special seismic mode.

RAM Structural System

159

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

8.2 Joint Requirements

The plastic bending moment of each beam (Mp), and for beams framing into the flange, the moment
resulting from the panel zone shear strength (Mpz) are reported. Mpz is calculated independently for
each beam as Vn (panel zone strength) x Beam Depth (distance between center of flanges). The Mpz
reported is the component of the panel zone moment in the direction that the beam frames into the
column flange (less than the full panel zone moment if the beam is not parallel to the column web). If no
panel zone value can be calculated or the beam frames into the column web then no value is shown for
Mpz in the output.
The minimum of Mp (beam moment strength) and Mpz (panel zone strength at the joint under
consideration) is used to calculate the required shear strength per 8.2b (1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S + 2M/L).
Where D is the dead load, L is the positive live load and S is snow load if it exists. Mpz is only considered
if it has a positive magnitude.

8.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections

The shear in the column above the joint is considered when calculating the panel zone shear force using
the above generated load combination.
The panel zone strength is the minimum value calculated for all the beams framing into the column
flanges.
Where a web plate (doubler) is provided its capacity is added to that of the column web when
calculating the joint capacity. The depth of the web plate is taken as the clear height between the flanges
of the column.

8.4 Beam and Column Limitations

Round hollow structural section columns are limited to the compact width-thickness ratio from Table
B5 in the AISC-LRFD specification.
The Pu value used in Table 8-1 is the maximum compression load on the element from all standard
provision load combinations.

8.5. Continuity Plates

Stiffeners are only designed for flange bending requirement of chapter K in LRFD 3rd Edition.
The required area of the stiffeners is calculated as the difference in the design force and the flange
capacity (Rn) divided by the stiffener yield strength.

8.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio

Nominal strength of panel zone is taken as the value calculated in section 8.3.
The db value is taken as the average depth of all the fixed, steel lateral beams framing into the joint.
When calculating the shear capacity of a story for exception 2, all columns, not only those columns of the
special moment frame type, are considered.

RAM Structural System

160

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

9 Concentrically Braced Frames

9.2. Bracing Members
To perform the lateral force distribution checks on braced frames per Section 9.2c, the engineer is
required to assign the same frame number to all the braces in the same line of bracing. Also, the Use
Frame Nos. to Designate a Frame Line option must be selected in the Seismic Code Dialog obtained
by selecting the Criteria-Codes command.
Note: The force distribution requirement for 9.2c is performed on a per story basis. If the distribution
on a single story exceeds the lateral distribution limit, then the braces of that story are checks for
compliance with the exception. Note that the full strength of the braces (excluding phi factor) is used to
check compliance with the exception.
The web of a HSS (Tube) section for special concentric braced frame is checked in accordance with the
Stiffened Webs in Combined Axial and Bending provision of LRFD Table B5.1. This is true even if no
bending exists on the member as the tube is required to be Compact per 12.2d (for SCBF) and pure
compression does not have a compact limit in Table B5.1.
In 9.2d, the h/t and b/t limits are calculated in accordance with the AISC-LRFD specification. For HSS
sections b = Flange Width 3 x Web Thickness and h = Depth 2 x Flange Thickness.

9.4. Special Bracing Configuration Requirements

Per Section 9.4.a.1. The chevron braces are checked for all the loads from standard provision load
combinations that include a seismic load case.

9.5 Low Buildings

The low building exception is applied if the user indicates to apply the one and two story exceptions
(refer to CriteriaCodes command), or if the member is at the top most lateral story.

RAM Structural System

161

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provisions Technical Notes

Code Check

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

162

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provision Reports

A number of reports are available in Steel-Seismic Provision Mode. Many of these have already been
described in Chapter 4. The reports presented below are those that are not described in the above
referenced section and are specific to the Steel Seismic Provision Mode.
Many of the reports are based on load combinations (member forces, reactions etc). In Steel Seismic
Provision Mode these reports are all based on the seismic load combinations (generated and custom)
from this mode only.
The reports available in the Steel-Seismic Provision mode are for the most part identical to those
available in the Steel Standard Provision mode. Only those reports in which the content changed are
described below. Refer to Chapter 4, for all other reports not described below. Note that all reports that
use load combinations will show results for the load combinations (generated and custom) that are
created in the seismic provision mode.
Load
Combinations

The Load Combinations report is a listing of the analyzed load cases of which the
combinations are comprised, the program-generated load combinations, and the
user-defined load combinations from this mode only. Note that the standard
provision load combinations play an important part in the checks performed in
the steel seismic mode. The engineer should switch to the Steel Standard
Provision mode to print the standard provision load combinations.

Member Code
Check

The Member Code Check report lists detailed results of the currently selected
Seismic Code Specifications check for individual members. The report includes
member information, design parameters, and the results of all the checks
performed on each member.
Member Code Check reports can be printed for a single frame member, all frame
members included in a fenced area, all members of a selected frame, all frame
members shown in the current view or for every frame member in the model.

Joint Code Check

The Member Code Check report shows detailed results of the currently selected
Seismic Code Specification checks for individual moment frame joints. The report
includes member information, design parameters, and the results of all the checks
performed on each joint.
Joint Code Check reports can be printed for a single frame member, all joint
members included in a fenced area, all joints of a selected frame, all frame joints
shown in the current view or for every frame joint in the model.

Member Check
Summary

The Member Code Check Summary report lists each seismic check performed on a
member, and the result of each check. The report is the same as the list of checks
and results displayed in the member view-update dialog

Joint Check
Summary

The Joint Code Check Summary report lists each seismic check performed on a
joint, and the result of each check. The report is the same as the list of checks and
results displayed in the joint view-update dialog.

RAM Structural System

163

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provision Reports

Load Combinations
Star Seismic
Summary

The Star Seismic Summary lists each Star Seismic BRB result of the currently
selected Seismic Code Specification. The report includes member information,
design parameters, and the results of all the checks performed on each brace.

7.1 Load Combinations

The Load Combinations report lists the combinations used in the seismic provision steel code checks.
The report includes the Roof Live Load criteria, which affects the generated load combinations.
The load cases included in the load combinations are listed along with the generated and user-specified
load combinations, as well as which of the combinations are selected to be used in the code check. For
generated combinations the Code specified as the basis of the generation is indicated. For example,
AISC 1997 indicates that the generated combinations are for AISC 1997 design, based on the
combinations specified by the AISC 1997 design specification. The Omega value on which the load
combinations are based is also displayed.

7.2 Member Code Check

The Member reports generated vary depending on the currently selected seismic code, the options
selected for that code (Zone, One Story Exceptions etc) and the frame type being checked. To show all
the possible variations on the reports is impractical.
All reports will display some fundamental information on the member properties (Yield Strength, Size
etc), the story number, frame number, and the frame type. If seismic checks are required then the report
will clearly show which code checks were performed (referencing the code section directly) and the
results of each of these checks. The engineer is encouraged to refer directly to the section (as shown in
the output) in the currently selected seismic code when reviewing the results.

7.3 Member Check Summary

Due to the nature of the seismic provision checks (being one of multiple detailing and design checks), no
single output line would suffice to report the result of a code check. As such the summary results report
a single line for each check performed on a member, along with the result for that check (if the check is a
design requirement and not simply a detailing requirement). For a single member that means several
lines of output. Each line should clearly state the member, story, frame number and for each check the
code reference (section) and the result.

RAM Structural System

164

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provision Reports

Joint Check Summary

7.4 Joint Code Check

The joint reports generated vary depending on the currently selected seismic code, the options selected
for that code (Zone etc) and the frame type being checked. To show all the possible variations on the
reports is impractical.
All reports will display some fundamental information on the joints properties (Yield Strength, Size
etc), the story number, frame number, and the frame type. If seismic checks are required then the report
will clearly show which code checks were performed (referencing the code section directly) and the
results of each of these checks. The engineer is encouraged to refer directly to the section (as shown in
the output) in the currently selected seismic code when reviewing the results.
Note that code checks are only performed for valid moment frame joints as described in Section 3.3.1,
Assumptions and Limitations.

7.5 Joint Check Summary

Due to the nature of the seismic provision checks (being one of multiple detailing and design checks), no
single output line would suffice to report the result of a code check. As such the summary results report
a single line for each check performed on a joint, along with the result for that check (if the check is a
design requirement and not simply a detailing requirement). For a single joint that means several lines
of output. Each line should clearly state the joint, story, frame number and for each check the code
reference (section) and the result.
Note that code checks are only performed for valid moment frame joints as described in Section 3.3.1,
Assumptions and Limitations.

RAM Structural System

165

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Steel Seismic Provision Reports

Joint Check Summary

This page intentionally left blank

RAM Structural System

166

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Index
A

AISC
member code check 100
AISC - ASD 9th
local web yielding 87
AISC -AISD 9th
joint code check 87
AISC -ASD 9th
panel zone checks 87
stifener design 87
web crippling 87
AISC 1997 - LRFD
code check 146
columns 147
eccentrically braced frames
150, 152, 153
FEMA 350 154
intermediate moment
frames 149
limitations 146
materials 147
ordinary concentrically
braced frames 149
ordinary moment frames
149
seismic design categories
146
special concentric braced
frames 149
special moment frames 147,
148
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD
code check 137
eccentrically braced frames
142, 144, 145
intermediate moment
frames 141
limitations 137
materials 138
members 138, 139

RAM Structural System

ordinary concentrically
braced frames 141
ordinary moment frames
141
seismic design categories
138
special concentric braced
frames 141
special moment frames 139,
140
special truss moment
frames 141
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD)
load combinations 138, 146
loads 138, 146
nominal strengths 138, 146
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) - ASD
and LRFD
buckling restrained braced
frame 136, 137
eccentrically braced frames
132, 134, 135
general seismic design
requirements 124
intermediate moment
frames 129, 130
limitations 124
load combinations 124
loads 124
materials 125
members 125, 126
nominal strengths 124
ordinary concentrically
braced frames 132
ordinary moment frames
130
special concentric braced
frames 131
special moment frames
126129

167

special truss moment

frames 131
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD
and LRFD
code check 124
AISC 360
joint code check 87
local web yielding 88
panel zone check 88
stiffener design 88
web crippling 88
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD
buckling restrained braces
52
connector spacing for
double angles 52
direct analysis method 45
error messages 52
K-factor 52
load combinations 50
member code check 45
notional loads 48
reduced stiffness 49
second order analysis 45
AISC 360 direct analysis
validation
design code 98
notional loads 99
reduced stiffness 99
second-order analysis 98
steel standard provisions
reports 98
stiffener design
joint code check 105
web plate details
joint code check 105
AISC ASD critera
column moments 16
AISC ASD criteria
axial slenderness limits 17
B1 Factors 15

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

B2 Factors 15
design criteria 15
flange bracing 16
joints 17
K-Factor 16
sidesway 16
aligning notional load cases with
a specific direction
BS5950:1990 59
BS5950:2000 59
allowable strength design
combinations
load combinations 50
allowable stress design
combinations
ASD 9th 54
LRFD 3rd 54
amplified first order analysis
second order analysis 46
amplified sway factor Kamp
BS5950:1990 63
BS5950:2000 63
amplified sway method
BS5950:1990 63
BS5950:2000 63
analysis method
AS 4100-98 75
second order analysis by
amplified first order
analysis 77
factors 78
b factors 77
AS
load combinations 79
AS 410-98
second order effects 75
AS 4100-98
analysis method 75
connector spacing for
double angles 81
design assumptions 81
design yield strength 79
effective length with Kefactor 80
error messages 82
joint code check 92, 93
load combinations 79

RAM Structural System

local flange bending tension 92

member code check 75, 101
notional loads 78
second order analysis by
geometric stiffness
method 77
stiffener design 92
web bearing yielding tension and
compression 92
web buckling - compression
92
web shear 92
ASCE 7-05
load combinations 50
ASD
criteria 112
ASD 9th
allowable stress design
combinations 54
buckling restrained braces
56
connector spacing for
double angles 55
design yield strength 55
error messages 56
IBC 2000 53
IBC 2003 53
K-factor 55
load and resistance factor
design combinations
54
load combinations 53
member code check 53
round bar slenderness limits
55
steel standard provisions
technical notes 53
unbraced bending length 64
assign menu
beams 27
braces 30
changing modes 35
columns 26
design process 34
exiting modes 35

168

frame numbers 32, 113

frame types 113
horizontal braces 29
joint view 33
member view 33
process menu 32
sidesway 31
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 113
steel standard provisions
post-processors 26
sway-sensitive design
method 31
update 33
assumptions
code check 123
assumptions and limitations
joint code check 82
Australia AS4100 criteria
column moments 25
effective length factors 25
flange bracing 25
joints 25
reduced beam sections 26
sidesway 25
steel standard provisions
post-processors 24
axial slenderness limits
AISC ASD criteria 17
CAN 22
CSA S16-01 22
LRFD criteria 17

B1 factor
second order analysis 47
B1 Factors
AISC ASD criteria 15
LRFD criteria 15
B2 factor
second order analysis 48
B2 Factors
AISC ASD criteria 15
LRFD criteria 15
beams
assign menu 27

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

effective lengths 28
flange bracing 28
reduced beam sections 29
unbraced lengths 28
beams - Lu for axial
minor axis bracing 42
beams - Lu for bending
minor axis bracing 43
beams with end connections
CAN 20, 22
CSA S16-01 20, 22
bending capacity
BS5950:1990 64
BS5950:2000 64
CAN 68
CSAS16-01 68
Eurocode 73
braces
assign menu 30
effective lengths 30
size 30
unbraced lengths 31
BS 5950
member code check 101
BS 5950 - draft amend, April
1998
joint code check 105
BS 5950-1:1990
BS5950:1990 64
BS5950:2000 64
BS5950
column moments 24
design 24
effective lengths 23
flange bracing 24
joints 24
reduced beam sections 24
sidesway 23
steel standard provisions
post-processors 22
BS5950 - draft amend, April
1998
final design 105
results 105
stiffener design 106
BS5950 Part 1:1990
joint code check 88

RAM Structural System

stiffener design 89
web buckling 89
web shear 89
web tensile force 89
BS5950-1:2000
final design 105
joint code check 105
results 105
stiffener design 106
BS5950-1:2000 specific
BS5950:1990 67
BS5950:2000 67
BS5950:1900
moment amplification 62
BS5950:1990
aligning notional load cases
with a specific
direction 59
amplified sway factor Kamp
63
amplified sway method 63
bending capacity 64
BS 5950-1:1990 64
BS5950-1:2000 specific 67
calculating sway state per
load combination 58
calculating cr per load
combination 58
cross section classification
56
design yield strength 64
effective length method 63
effective lengths 60, 61
error messages 66
load combinations 57, 67
member code check 56
non-sway sensitive 57
notional loads in load
combinations 58
P-delta 63
section capacity
BS5950-1:1990 65
section capacity
BS5950-1:2000 65
sway sensitive 57
unbraced bending length 55

169

web shear interaction

BS5950-1:2000 66
BS5950:2000
aligning notional load cases
with a specific
direction 59
amplified sway factor Kamp
63
amplified sway method 63
bending capacity 64
BS 5950-1:1990 64
BS5950-1:2000 specific 67
calculating sway state per
load combination 58
calculating cr per load
combination 58
cross section classification
56
design yield strength 64
effective length method 63
effective lengths 60, 61
load combinations 57, 67
member code check 56, 57
moment amplification 62
notional loads in load
combinations 58
P-delta 63
section capacity
BS5950-1:1990 65
section capacity
BS5950-1:2000 65
unbraced bending length 55
web shear interaction
BS5950-1:2000 66
BS5950:Part 1 1990
web bearing tension and
compression 89
BS5950:Part 1:1990
BS5950:Part 1:2000 89
BS5950:Part 1:2000
BS5950:Part 1:1990 89
buckling restrained braced
frame
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 136,
137
buckling restrained braces

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 52

ASD 9th 56
LRFD 3rd 56

calculating sway state per load

combination
BS5950:1990 58
BS5950:2000 58
calculating cr per load
combination
BS5950:1990 58
BS5950:2000 58
CAN
axial slenderness limits 22
beams with end connections
20, 22
bending capacity 68
column moments 22
compression 21.3 90
connector spacing for
double angles 69
design yield strength 68
effective length 67
flange bracing 22
joints 22
K-Factor 22
member code check 67, 68
panel zone - web shear 90
section capacity 69
steel standard provisions
post-processors 21
tension 21.3 90
CAN/CSA S16-01
error messages 69
joint code check 90
CAN/CSA S16-09
bending capacity 71
connector spacing 71
design yield strength 70
effective length 70
error messages 71
load combinations 70
unbraced bending length 70
changing modes
assign menu 35

RAM Structural System

steel seismic provisions

post-processors 119
cocde check criteria
steel standard provisions
reports 97
code check
AISC 1997 - LRFD 146
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 137
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05)
ASD and LRFD 124
assumptions 123
limitations 123
reduced beam section check
123
steel seismic provisions 123
UBC97 - ASD 155
code check criteria
member check summary
102
codes
criteria 111
design criteria 15
column moments
AISC ASD critera 16
Australia AS4100 criteria 25
BS5950 24
CAN 22
CSA S16-01 22
Eurocode criteria 21
LRFD criteria 16
minor axis bracing 44
column requirements
UBC97 - ASD 156
UBS 1997 - LRFD 159
columns
AISC 1997 147
assign menu 26
effective length factors 26
flange bracing 27
size 26
unbraced lengths 27
columns - unbraced length
minor axis bracing 43
compression 21.3
CAN 90
CSA S16-01 90

170

compression flange bracing

steel standard provisions
technical notes 41
concentrically braced frames
UBC 1997 - LRFD 161
connector spacing for double
angles
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 52
AS 4100-98 81
ASD 9th 55
CAN 69
CSAS16-01 69
LRFD 3rd 55
criteria
AISC ASD 15
ASD 112
codes 111
design 15
Eurocode 20
joint code check 103
LFRD 112
LRFD 15
member check summary
102
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 111
cross section classification
BS5950:1990 56
BS5950:2000 56
steel standard provisions
technical notes 40
CSA S16-01
axial slenderness limits 22
beams with end connections
20, 22
column moments 22
compression 21.3 90
flange bracing 22
joints 22
K-Factor 22
panel zone - web shear 90
steel standard provisions
post-processors 21
tension 21.3 90
CSA/CAN S16-09
section capacity 71
CSAS16-01

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

bending capacity 68
connector spacing for
double angles 69
design yield strength 68
effective length 67
member code check 67, 68
section capacity 69
custom load combinations
load combinations 14, 111

design
BS5950 24
design assumptions
AS 4100-98 81
design code
AISC 360 direct analysis
validation 98
design criteria
AISC ASD criteria 15
codes 15
Eurocode criteria 20
LRFD criteria 15
steel standard provisions
post-processors 15
design process
assign menu 34
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 117
design yield strength
AS 4100-98 79
ASD 9th 55
BS5950:1990 64
BS5950:2000 64
CAN 68
CSAS16-01 68
Eurocode 72
LRFD 3rd 55
direct analysis method
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 45
direct analysis validation report
load combinations 51

eccentrically braced frames

RAM Structural System

AISC 1997 - LRFD 150, 152,

153
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 142, 144, 145
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 132,
134, 135
effective length
CAN 67
CSAS16-01 67
Eurocode 72
effective length factors
Australia AS4100 criteria 25
columns 26
Eurocode criteria 21
horizontal braces 29
effective length method
BS5950:1990 63
BS5950:2000 63
effective length with Ke-factor
AS 4100-98 80
effective lengths
beams 28
braces 30
BS5950 23
BS5950:1990 60, 61
BS5950:2000 60
elastic critical moment
Eurocode 73
error messages
AS 4100-98 82
ASD 9th 56
BS5950:1990 66
BS5950:2000 66
CAN/CSA S16-01 69
CAN/CSA S16-09 71
Eurocode 75
LRFD 3rd 56
Eurocode
bending capacity 73
design yield strength 72
effective length 72
elastic critical moment 73
error messages 75
load combinations 72
member code check 100
unbraced bending length 72

171

Eurocode 3 BS EN
1993-1-8:2005
panel design 106
Eurocode 3:BS EN 1993-1-8
resistance of compression
zone (web bearing)
91
Eurocode 3:BS EN
1993-1-8:2005
joint code check 90, 106
panel zone - web shear 90
resistance of tension zone
(flange bending) 91
resistance of tension zone
(web bearing) 91
stiffener design 91, 106
Eurocode criteria
column moments 21
design criteria 20
effective length factors 21
flange bracing 21
joints 21
reduced beam sections 21
sidesway 20
exiting modes
assign menu 35
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 119

FEMA 350
AISC 1997 - LRFD 154
frame design 154, 155
reduced beam section
connections 155
final design
BS5950 - draft amend, April
1998 105
BS5950-1:2000 105
joint code check 103
flange bracing
Australia AS4100 criteria 25
beams 28
BS5950 24
CAN 22
columns 27

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

CSA S16-01 22
Eurocode criteria 21
horizontal braces 30
flexural-torsional buckling of
tees
minor axis bracing 44
forces
joints 18
frame design
FEMA 350 154, 155
frame numbers
assign menu 32, 113
frame types
assign menu 113

general
steel standard provisions
technical notes 37
general seismic design
requirements
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 124
generated load combinations
load combinations 14, 110
geometric stiffness method
second order analysis 46
geometry
joints 17

horizontal braces
assign menu 29
effective length factors 29
flange bracing 30
minor axis bracing 44
size 29
unbraced lengths 30

IBC 2000
ASD 9th 53
LRFD 3rd 53
IBC 2003
ASD 9th 53

RAM Structural System

LRFD 3rd 53
IBC 2006
load combinations 50
IBS 2009
load combinations 50
intermediate moment frames
AISC 1997 - LRFD 149
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 141
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 129,
130
introduction 11

joint check summary

steel seismic provision
reports 165
joint code check
AISC -AISD 9th 87
AISC 360 87
stiffener design 105
web plate details 105
AS 4100-98 92, 93
assumptions and limitations
82
BS 5950 - draft amend, April
1998 105
BS5950 Part 1:1990 88
BS5950-1:2000 105
CAN/CSA S16-01 90
CAN/CSA S16-09 90
criteria 103
Eurocode 3:BS EN
1993-1-8:2005 90,
106
final design 103
joint data 103
joint design 86
joint forces 84
joint number 103
LRFD 3rd 87
material properties 103
process menu 34, 116
results 103

172

steel seismic provision

reports 164
steel standard provisions
reports 102
steel standard provisions
technical notes 82
story number 102
joint data
joint code check 103
joint design
joint code check 86
joint forces
joint code check 84
joint number
joint code check 103
joint view
assign menu 33
joint view/update
process menu 115
joints
AISC ASD criteria 17
Australia AS4100 criteria 25
BS5950 24
CAN 22
CSA S16-01 22
Eurocode criteria 21
forces 18
geometry 17
LRFD criteria 17
materials 17
optimization 19

k factor
CAN/CSA 70
K-factor
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 52
ASD 9th 55
LRFD 3rd 55
K-Factor
AISC ASD criteria 16
CAN 22
CSA S16-01 22
LRFD criteria 16
kinked column equivalent
uniform moment

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

minor axis bracing 45

LFRD
criteria 112
limitations
AISC 1997 - LRFD 146
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 137
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 124
code check 123
UBC97 - ASD 155
UBS 1997 - LRFD 158
load and resistance factor
design combinations
ASD 9th 54
load combinations 51
LRFD 51
LRFD 3rd 54
load cases
aligning, with a specific
direction 59
load combinations
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 138, 146
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 124
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 50
allowable strength design
combinations 50
AS 79
AS 4100-98 79
ASCE 7-05 50
ASD 9th 53
BS5950:1990 57, 67
BS5950:2000 57, 67
calculating sway state per
58
calculating cr per 58
custom load combinations
14, 111
direct analysis validation
report 51
Eurocode 72

RAM Structural System

generated load
combinations 14,
110
IBC 2006 50
IBS 2009 50
load and resistance factor
design combinations
51
LRFD 51
LRFD 3rd 53
member check summary
102
notional loads in 58
NZS 1170 79
steel seismic provision
reports 164
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 109
steel seismic provisions
technical notes 122
steel standard provisions
post-processors 14
steel standard provisions
reports 97
steel standard provisions
technical notes 39
loads
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 138, 146
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 124
local flange bending - tension
AS 4100-98 92
local web yielding
AISC - ASD 9th 87
AISC 360 88
LRFD 3rd 88
LRFD 3rd
allowable stress design
combinations 54
buckling restrained braces
56
connector spacing for
double angles 55
design yield strength 55
error messages 56
IBC 2000 53

173

IBC 2003 53
joint code check 87
K-factor 55
load and resistance factor
design combinations
54
load combinations 53
local web yielding 88
member code check 53
panel zone check 88
round bar slenderness limits
55
steel standard provisions
technical notes 53
stiffener design 88
unbraced bending length 64
web crippling 88
LRFD criteria
axial slenderness limits 17
B1 Factors 15
B2 Factors 15
column moments 16
design criteria 15
flange bracing 16
joints 17
K-Factor 16
sidesway 16

major axis bracing

steel standard provisions
technical notes 41
material properties
joint code check 103
materials
AISC 1997 - LRFD 147
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 138
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 125
joints 17
UBC97 - ASD 156
member check summary
code check criteria 102
criteria 102
load combinations 102

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

steel seismic provision

reports 164
steel standard provisions
reports 102
summary results 102
member code check
AISC 100
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD
45, 52
AS 4100-98 75, 101
ASD 9th 53
BS 5950 101
BS5950:1990 56
BS5950:2000 56
CAN 67, 68
CAN/CSA S16-01 100
CSAS16-01 67, 68
Eurocode 100
LRFD 3rd 53
process menu 33, 115
steel seismic provision
reports 164
steel standard provisions
reports 100
steel standard provisions
technical notes 45
member force summary
steel standard provisions
reports 107
member forces
steel standard provisions
reports 106
member forces envelope
steel standard provisions
reports 107
member view
assign menu 33
process menu 114
members
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 138, 139
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 125,
126
memeber code check
Eurocode 72
minor axis bracing

RAM Structural System

beams - Lu for axial 42

beams - Lu for bending 43
column moments 44
columns - unbraced length
43
flexural-torsional buckling
of tees 44
horizontal braces 44
kinked column equivalent
uniform moment 45
steel standard provisions
technical notes 42
user assigned unbraced
length 43
model status
steel standard provisions
post-processors 13
models
saving 13
modes
changing 119
exiting 119
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 109
steel standard provisions
post-processors 13
moment amplification
BS5950:1900 62
BS5950:2000 62

notional loads in load

combinations
BS5950:1990 58
BS5950:2000 58
NZS 1170
load combinations 79

OCCS 131
optimization
joints 19
ordinary cantilever column
system 131
ordinary concentrically braced
frames
AISC 1997 - LRFD 149
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 141
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 132
ordinary moment frames
AISC 1997 - LRFD 149
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 141
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 130
UBC 1997 - LRFD 159
UBC97 - ASD 156

NDy, NDx, NLx, NLy 59

nominal strengths
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 138, 146
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 124
non-sway sensitive
BS5950:1990 57
BS5950:2000 57
notional loads
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 48
AISC 360 direct analysis
validation 99
AS 4100-98 78

174

P-delta
BS5950:1990 63
BS5950:2000 63
panel design
Eurocode 3 BS EN
1993-1-8:2005 106
panel zone - web shear
CAN 90
CSA S16-01 90
Eurocode 3:BS EN
1993-1-8:2005 90
panel zone check
AISC 360 88
LRFD 3rd 88
panel zone checks
AISC -ASD 9th 87

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

process menu
assign menu 32
joint code check 34, 116
joint view/update 115
member code check 33, 115
member view 114
steel seismic provisions
post-processors 114
update 114
update result icon 116
view result icon 116

reduced beam section check

code check 123
reduced beam section
connections
FEMA 350 155
reduced beam sections
Australia AS4100 criteria 26
beams 29
BS5950 24
Eurocode criteria 21
reduced stiffness
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 49
AISC 360 direct analysis
validation 99
resistance of compression zone
(web bearing)
Eurocode 3:BS EN 1993-1-8
91
resistance of tension zone
(flange bending)
Eurocode 3:BS EN
1993-1-8:2005 91
resistance of tension zone (web
bearing)
Eurocode 3:BS EN
1993-1-8:2005 91
results
BS5950 - draft amend, April
1998 105
BS5950-1:2000 105
joint code check 103
round bar slenderness limits
ASD 9th 55

RAM Structural System

LRFD 3rd 55

saving the model

steel standard provisions
post-processors 13
sccs 131
second order analysis
AISC 360 - ASD and LRFD 45
B1 factor 47
B2 factor 48
by amplified first order
analysis 46
by geometric stiffness
method 46
second order analysis by
amplified first order
analysis
analysis method 77
second order analysis by
geometric stiffness
method
AS 4100-98 77
second order effects
AS 410-98 75
second-order analysis
AISC 360 direct analysis
validation 98
section capacity
CAN 69
CSAS16-01 69
section capacity BS5950-1:1990
BS5950:1990 65
BS5950:2000 65
section capacity BS5950-1:2000
BS5950:1990 65
BS5950:2000 65
seismic design categories
AISC 1997 - LRFD 146
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 138
seismic provisions for structural
steel buildings in seismic
zone 3
UBC97 - ASD 156

175

seismic provisions for structural

steel buildings in seismic
zone 4
UBC97 - ASD 156
sidesway
AISC ASD criteria 16
assign menu 31
Australia AS4100 criteria 25
BS5950 23
Eurocode criteria 20
LRFD criteria 16
single angles
CAN/CSA S16-09 71
size
braces 30
columns 26
horizontal braces 29
sloping beams
steel standard provisions
technical notes 39
special cantilever column
systems 131
special concentric braced
frames
AISC 1997 - LRFD 149
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 141
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 131
special moment frame
UBC97 - ASD 157, 158
special moment frames
AISC 1997 - LRFD 147, 148
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 139, 140
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD
126129
UBS 1997 - LRFD 159, 160
special truss moment frames
AISC 2002 (ANSI 341-02) LRFD 141
AISC 2005 (ANSI 341-05) ASD and LRFD 131
steel design codes
steel standard provisions
technical notes 37

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

steel seismic provision reports

joint check summary 165
joint code check 164
load combinations 164
member check summary
164
member code check 164
steel seismic provisions postprocessors
assign menu 113
changing modes 119
criteria 111
design process 117
exiting modes 119
load combinations 109
modes 109
process menu 114
steel seismic provisions
technical notes
load combinations 122
UBC 1997 LRFD 158
steel shapes
steel standard provisions
technical notes 38
steel standard provision postprocessors 13
steel standard provisions postprocessors
assign menu 26
Australia AS4100 criteria 24
BS5950 22
CAN 21
CSA S16-01 21
design criteria 15
load combinations 14
model status 13
modes 13
saving the model 13
steel standard provisions
reports
AISC 360 direct analysis
validation 98
cocde check criteria 97
joint code check 102
load combinations 97
member check summary
102

RAM Structural System

member code check 100

member force summary 107
member forces 106
member forces envelope
107
steel standard provisions
technical notes
ASD 9th 53
compression flange bracing
41
cross section classification
40
general 37
joint code check 82
load combinations 39
LRFD 3rd 53
major axis bracing 41
member code check 45
minor axis bracing 42
sloping beams 39
steel design codes 37
steel shapes 38
tension capacity 41
torsion 41
stifener design
AISC -ASD 9th 87
stiffener design
AISC 360 88
AS 4100-98 92
BS5950 - draft amend, April
1998 106
BS5950 Part 1:1990 89
BS5950-1:2000 106
Eurocode 3:BS EN
1993-1-8:2005 91,
106
LRFD 3rd 88
story number
joint code check 102
summary results
member check summary
102
sway-sensitive design method
assign menu 31
BS5950:2000 only 31

176

tension 21.3
CAN 90
CSA S16-01 90
tension capacity
steel standard provisions
technical notes 41
torsion
steel standard provisions
technical notes 41

UBC 1997 - LRFD

concentrically braced
frames 161
ordinary moment frames
159
UBC 1997 LRFD
steel seismic provisions
technical notes 158
UBC97 - ASD
code check 155
column requirements 156
limitations 155
materials 156
ordinary moment frames
156
seismic provisions for
structural steel
buildings in seismic
zone 3 156
seismic provisions for
structural steel
buildings in seismic
zone 4 156
special moment frame 157,
158
UBS 1997 - LRFD
column requirements 159
limitations 158
special moment frames 159,
160
unbraced bending length
ASD 9th 64
BS5950:1990 55
BS5950:2000 55

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

Eurocode 72
LRFD 3rd 64
unbraced lengths
beams 28
braces 31
columns 27
horizontal braces 30
update
assign menu 33
process menu 114
update result icon
process menu 116
user assigned unbraced length
minor axis bracing 43

view result icon

RAM Structural System

process menu 116

web bearing tension and

compression
BS5950:Part 1 1990 89
web bearing yielding - tension
and compression
AS 4100-98 92
web buckling
BS5950 Part 1:1990 89
web buckling - compression
AS 4100-98 92
web crippling
AISC -ASD 9th 87
AISC 360 88
LRFD 3rd 88

177

web shear
AS 4100-98 92
BS5950 Part 1:1990 89
web shear interaction
BS5950-1:2000
BS5950:1990 66
BS5950:2000 66
web tensile force
BS5950 Part 1:1990 89

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors

RAM Structural System

178

RAM Frame Steel Post-Processors